JP2019141126A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve game motivation of a game player.SOLUTION: In a pachinko machine 1, a special lottery period and the special lottery object rendering are selected and set when time reduction control is started after the completion of a jackpot game state. Then, "super ready-to-win variation" is selected by a game determination executed during the special lottery period being set previously. Also, the special lottery processing is executed in place of normal lottery processing as lottery processing to select a mode of the advance notice rendering, when the special lottery object rendering being set previously is selected as classification of advance notice rendering for suggesting results of game determination. Particularly, in the special lottery processing, the probability where the uppermost mode of the jackpot expectation degree is selected as the mode of the advance notice rendering becomes higher in comparison with the normal lottery processing.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 44

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which a suggestion effect suggesting the possibility of occurrence of a specific gaming state is executed.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine in which a suggestive effect that suggests the possibility that a specific gaming state will occur is executed (see Patent Document 1).
In this gaming machine, a main notice effect and a sub notice effect are executed as a notice effect (suggestion effect). When selecting the contents of the notice effect, first, a notice effect group is selected according to the type of the variation pattern. Then, the content of the main notice effect and the content of the sub notice effect are selected according to the selected notice effect group.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-110031

However, with conventional gaming machines, there is a risk that the player's willingness to play will be reduced.
In other words, in a conventional gaming machine, the expectation level is high as the content of the notice effect, even though a high expectation type is selected as the variation pattern type during the occurrence of a gaming state advantageous to the player. There is a possibility that a situation in which high content is not selected may occur continuously. If such a situation occurs continuously, despite the occurrence of a gaming state advantageous to the player, the player may have an impression of a big hit, and the player's willingness to play may be reduced.
An object of the present invention is to improve a player's willingness to play.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention includes a winning determination unit that determines whether or not to cause a specific gaming state, and a variation mode determination unit that executes a variation mode determination that determines a variation mode. And an effect control means for executing a suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of occurrence of a specific gaming state, and when the predetermined variation mode is determined by the variation mode determination performed during the predetermined period, As compared with the case where the variation mode is determined, the predetermined mode is easily selected as the mode of the suggestive effect.
In the gaming machine according to the first aspect, when the predetermined variation mode is selected during the predetermined period, the suggested effect of the predetermined mode is more likely to appear than when the other variation mode is selected.
Accordingly, for example, the predetermined variation mode is changed to a variation mode having a high degree of expectation compared to other variation modes, and the predetermined mode is changed to a mode having a high expectation level compared to other modes. Although a variation mode with a high degree of expectation is selected as an aspect, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a mode with a high degree of expectation is not selected as an aspect of the suggestive effect.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the first invention, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play.
Here, the specific game state corresponds to a jackpot game state described later. The winning determination means corresponds to a main control circuit 200 (step S9-8, step S11-4) described later. The variation mode corresponds to the type of variation pattern described later. A main control circuit 200 (step S9-8, step S11-7), which will be described later, corresponds to the variation mode determination means. As the suggestion effect, a pre-reading notice effect (holding notice effect, an accessory continuous notice effect, etc.) or a main notice effect (telop notice, cut-in notice, button notice, etc.) described later is applicable. An effect control circuit 300 to be described later corresponds to the effect control means. The predetermined period corresponds to a special lottery period described later. As the predetermined variation mode, “super reach variation” described later corresponds. As the predetermined mode, a mode with the highest jackpot expectation level (or reach expectation level) described later corresponds.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, further comprising a predetermined gaming state control means for causing a predetermined gaming state advantageous to the player after the specific gaming state is finished, It is included in the occurrence of a predetermined gaming state.
According to the gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an impression that the big hit is far away even though the gaming state advantageous to the player is occurring.
Here, the predetermined game state that is advantageous to the player corresponds to a state during execution of time-shortening control (or “special figure high probability state”) described later. The predetermined game state control means corresponds to a main control circuit 200 (step S18-2) described later.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play.

It is a perspective view which shows the whole structure of a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed the front of a game board and showed typically the part required for description. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the control system of a pachinko machine. 3 is an address map of a memory area used by a CPU 210. It is a figure which shows the structure of a main display and a performance display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows CPU initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows a main loop process. It is a flowchart which shows the evacuation process at the time of a power supply interruption. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting value management process. It is a flowchart which shows a dynamic port output process. It is a flowchart which shows a performance display apparatus output process. It is a flowchart which shows switch management processing. It is a flowchart which shows a usual start ball | bowl detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a starting ball detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a starting ball detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows a special game management process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure fluctuation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special electric role opening / closing switching process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening release control process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening closing effective process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening release end wait process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal game management process. It is a flowchart which shows a usual figure change waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a usual figure stop. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory release pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric role opening / closing switching process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory release control process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory closing effective process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric accessory release completion | finish weight process. It is a flowchart which shows a performance display apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows a base ratio calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows a sub timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch command reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows a stop command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch notice effect setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a notification effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an opening command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows an ending command reception process.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In this embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to the pachinko machine 1.

(Overall configuration of pachinko machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of the pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame unit 2, an inner frame unit 3, an integrated door unit 4, and a game board unit 10.
The outer frame unit 2, the inner frame unit 3, and the integrated door unit 4 are fixed to each other via a hinge mechanism. Thereby, the inner frame unit 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2. The integrated door unit 4 can be opened and closed with respect to each of the inner frame unit 3 and the outer frame unit 2.
The outer frame unit 2 includes a rectangular frame (outer frame). And the outer frame with which the outer frame unit 2 is provided is fixed with respect to the island facility of a game arcade.
The inner frame unit 3 includes a rectangular frame (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is disposed inside the outer frame unit 2.

The integrated door unit 4 is formed in a rectangular door shape. The door unit 4 includes a transparent plate 4a disposed substantially at the center, a decorative portion 4b disposed around the transparent plate 4a, a tray unit 5 disposed below the transparent plate 4a, and a tray. And a firing handle 6 disposed on the side of the unit 5.
The transparent plate 4a is formed in a flat plate shape using a transparent material such as resin or glass. The decorative portion 4b is formed of a transparent or translucent resin material, and has a shape that bulges forward. Each corner on the upper side of the decorative portion 4b is provided with a sound extraction portion 4c in which a sound generator (speaker) 22 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. Each sound extraction part 4c is provided with a plurality of sound extraction holes through which the sound output from the sound generator 22 passes. In addition, a plurality of frame lamps 20 (see FIG. 3) are disposed in the decorative portion 4b. Each frame lamp 20 includes a light emitting element (LED) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The saucer unit 5 includes a saucer 5a for receiving game balls (rental balls and prize balls), and an effect button 5b and a rotary selector 5c disposed on the front side of the saucer 5a.
The effect button 5b is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and is disposed so as to protrude upward from the tray unit 5. The effect button 5b can be pressed by the player (pressed downward). Inside the saucer unit 5, a first operation detection switch 24 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a pressing operation of the effect button 5b is disposed. The first operation detection switch 24 outputs a first operation signal to the effect control circuit 300 (see FIG. 3) every time the effect button 5b is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called “jog dial”) is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and is disposed so as to surround the effect button 5b. The rotary selector 5c can be rotated by a player (operation to rotate about a cylindrical axis). Inside the tray unit 5, a second operation detection switch 25 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the rotation operation of the rotary selector 5c is disposed. The second operation detection switch 25 outputs a second operation signal to the effect control circuit 300 every time the rotary selector 5c is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60 [°]).

A lending operation unit 7 is disposed on the upper surface of the tray unit 5. The lending operation unit 7 includes a ball lending button 7a, a return button 7b, and a frequency display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to a CR unit 500 (see FIG. 3) capable of reading and updating information recorded on the prepaid card. When a prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit 500, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 500 is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, when the ball lending button 7a is operated in a state where the prepaid card is inserted into the CR unit 500, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the tray 5a. At this time, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card is updated according to the number of paid-out game balls, and the updated remaining frequency of the valuable medium is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, when the return button 7 b is operated in a state where the prepaid card having the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit 500, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit 500.
Here, the prepaid cart corresponds to, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a storage IC built-in medium, or the like.
The firing handle 6 can be rotated by the player. Inside the firing handle 6, a firing volume (not shown) for detecting the angle at which the firing handle 6 is rotated is disposed. The firing volume outputs a detection signal corresponding to the detected angle to the payout control circuit 400 (see FIG. 3).

(Configuration of the game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a front side of the game board and schematically showing a part particularly necessary for explanation.
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached to the inner side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3. Thus, the game board unit 10 is arranged on the back side of the integrated door unit 4. Then, the player can visually recognize a game board 11 (game area 30) to be described later via the transparent plate 4a. In the present embodiment, a game area 30 described later is formed between the back surface of the transparent plate 4 a and the front surface of the game board 11.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board unit 10 includes a set board (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set board, and various effect devices (main image display device 31, sub) attached to the set board. Image display device 32).
The set plate is formed in a box shape whose front side is open. An opening made of a through hole is provided at a substantially central portion of the back plate of the set plate.
The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set board. The game board 11 is formed in a flat plate shape with resin. An opening (not shown) made up of a through hole is provided in a substantially central portion of the game board 11. The player can view the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 through the opening provided in the game board 11 and the opening provided in the set board.
Around the opening in the front of the game board 11, a game area 30 is formed in which game balls launched in response to the rotation operation of the launch handle 6 flow down. The game area 30 includes a left path formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a right path formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 as paths through which the game balls flow down. Yes.
Further, a plurality of board surface lamps 21 (see FIG. 3) are disposed in the game area 30 of the game board 11. Each panel lamp 21 includes a light emitting element (LED) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The main image display device 31 is attached to the back side of the set plate. The main image display device 31 includes a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display. The main image display device 31 has a display screen 31a capable of displaying effect images.
On the display screen 31a, three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 (not shown) in which a first effect symbol z1 (not shown) is displayed and a second effect symbol z2 (not shown) are displayed. It is possible to configure one second effect symbol display area a4 (not shown).
The 1st production design z1 is constituted including identification information (symbol), such as a number, a character, a symbol, and a character. In each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, it is possible to perform change display and stop display of the first effect symbol z1. The second effect design z2 is composed of color bars. In the second effect symbol display area a4, it is possible to perform change display and stop display of the second effect symbol z2.
The variation display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 means that the first effect symbol z1 is moved (scrolled) in the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 and is displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. 2 A display in which the type of effect design z2 is changed (the color represented by the color bar is sequentially changed).
The stop display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 means that one kind of the first effect symbol z1 is stopped and the second effect symbol display area a4 in the lottery result display positions of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. 1, a display in which one type of second effect design z2 is displayed (a color bar represents a predetermined color).
A special symbol is obtained by combining the first effect symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 and the second effect symbol z2 that is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. The result of the lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) is displayed.
In addition, the display screen 31a can be configured with reserved symbol display areas b1 and b2 (not shown) in which a reserved symbol h (not shown) is displayed.
In the holding symbol display area b1, a holding symbol h corresponding to the start information in the notification display (special symbol variation display and stop display) is displayed. In the hold symbol display area b2, a hold symbol h corresponding to the start information for which the notification display is held is displayed.

The sub image display device 32 is disposed at a position on the front side of the main image display device 31.
The sub image display device 32 is configured by a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT display. The sub image display device 32 has a display screen 32a capable of displaying an effect image.
The sub image display device 32 can be displaced (moved) in the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Specifically, the sub image display device 32 can be displaced within a predetermined range including an origin position (see FIG. 2) and an effect position (not shown) below the origin position. Yes.
The sub image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the origin position is arranged above the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and does not cover the display screen 31a. On the other hand, the sub image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the effect position is arranged on the front side of the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31, and covers a part of the display screen 31a.

A first start port 51 is provided below the display screen 31 a in the game area 30. The first start port 51 is a ball entrance that is open upward (so-called “nose”), and a game ball can be entered at all times. The first start port 51 is capable of entering a game ball that flows down the left path (cannot enter a game ball that flows down the right path).
A special FIG. 1 start port switch 101 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the first start port 51. The special FIG. 1 start port switch 101 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the first start port 51 (the game ball has entered the first start port 51). Output. The main control circuit 200 executes the first special symbol lottery in response to the detection signal input from the special figure 1 start port switch 101.
On the left side of the first starting port 51 in the game area 30, an upper left other winning port 55, a left middle other winning port 56, and a lower left other winning port 57 are provided. Each of the other winning holes 55 to 57 is a ball opening that opens upward, and game balls can always be entered. Each of the other winning prize openings 55 to 57 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left path (impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the right path).
The game board 11 is provided with a left prize opening switch 106 (see FIG. 3). The left winning port switch 106 is a game ball that has entered the upper left other winning port 55 (game ball entering the upper left other winning port 55), and a game ball that has entered the left middle other winning port 56 (other left left winning items). In response to the detection of a game ball that has entered the lower left other winning port 57 (the game ball has entered the lower left other winning port 57). 200 is output. The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of the prize ball in response to the input of the detection signal from the left winning port switch 106.

A start gate 41 is provided on the right side of the display screen 31 a in the game area 30. The start gate 41 is formed so that it can always be passed by a game ball. The start gate 41 is capable of passing a game ball flowing down the right path (cannot pass a game ball flowing down the left path).
The start gate 41 is provided with a gate switch 104 (see FIG. 3). The gate switch 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the start gate 41 (passing of the start gate 41 by the game ball). The main control circuit 200 executes the normal symbol lottery in response to the detection signal input from the gate switch 104.
Below the start gate 41 in the game area 30, a big prize opening 53 is provided. The grand prize opening 53 is displaced between a closed state in which gaming balls cannot enter the grand prize opening 53 and an open state in which gaming balls can enter the grand prize opening 53. A special electric combination (special electric combination) 53a (so-called “attacker”) is provided.
The special electric accessory 53a is opened and closed by a special prize opening solenoid 65 (see FIG. 3). The special winning opening 53 is normally closed with the special electric accessory 53a closed, and it is impossible to enter a game ball. However, the first winning symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is won. Thus, when the big hit gaming state occurs, the special electric accessory 53a is opened, and the game ball can be entered. The big prize opening 53 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
A count switch 103 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the big prize opening 53. The count switch 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 53 (a game ball has entered the big prize opening 53). The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a prize ball payout operation in response to an input of a detection signal from the count switch 103.

A second start port 52 is provided below the special winning port 53 in the game area 30. The second start port 52 includes a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the second start port 52 and an open state in which a game ball can enter the second start port 52. An ordinary electric combination (ordinary electric combination) 52a (so-called “electric tulip”) that can be displaced is provided.
The ordinary electric accessory 52a is opened and closed by an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). The second starting port 52 is normally closed with the ordinary electric accessory 52a closed, so that it is impossible to enter a game ball. 52a is opened, and a game ball can be entered. The second starting port 52 can enter a game ball flowing down the right path (cannot enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
In the second start port 52, a special FIG. 2 start port switch 102 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. The special figure 2 start port switch 102 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the second start port 52 (the game ball has entered the second start port 52). Output. The main control circuit 200 executes the second special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 2 start port switch 102.
A right other winning port 54 is provided below the second starting port 52 in the game area 30. The other right winning port 54 is a ball opening that opens upward, and a game ball can be always entered. The right other winning port 54 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (cannot enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
In the other right winning opening 54, a right winning opening switch 105 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The right winning port switch 105 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the right other winning port 54 (a game ball that has entered the right other winning port 54). . The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the payout operation of the prize ball in response to the input of the detection signal from the right prize opening switch 105.

In the lowermost position in the game area 30, an out port 58 is provided for discharging game balls that have not entered (winned) any of the winning ports 51-57.
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which the game balls discharged from the game area 30 pass. Specifically, the discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame provided in the inner frame unit 3. The pachinko machine 1 is configured so that all game balls launched into the game area 30 (all game balls discharged from the game area 30) pass through the discharge path. In other words, the game ball launched into the game area 30 is discharged from the game area 30 by entering any of the winning holes 51 to 57 or passing through the out port 58 and flows into the discharge path. To do.
Specifically, the game balls that have entered the winning openings 51 to 57 are detected by the switches 101 to 103, 106, and 106 disposed in the winning openings and then guided to the discharge path. In addition, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 is guided to the discharge path.
The inner frame unit 3 is provided with an out switch 109 (see FIG. 3). The out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the discharge path (game ball discharged from the game area 30). As a result, all game balls discharged from the game area 30 are detected by the out switch 109.
Further, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged in the game area 30 so as to guide the game balls to the winning ports 51 to 57 and the start gate 41.

A main display 60 is disposed on the game board 11. The main display 60 includes a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is configured by a light emitting element (in the present embodiment, an LED).
Information related to the game is displayed on the main display 60. That is, the main display 60 includes a special figure 1 display apparatus, a special figure 2 display apparatus, a universal figure display apparatus, and a status display apparatus.
Specifically, the main display 60 includes 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32). And in the main display 60, LED1-LED8 becomes a special figure 1 display apparatus, LED7-LED16 becomes a special figure 2 display apparatus, LED17-LED24 becomes a common figure display apparatus, and LED25-LED32 shows a status display. It is a device.
The special figure 1 display device can perform change display and stop display of the first special symbol made up of numbers, symbols and the like. And in the special figure 1 display apparatus, the result of the 1st special symbol lottery is displayed by the 1st special symbol stopped and displayed.
The special figure 2 display device can perform change display and stop display of the second special symbol made up of numbers, symbols and the like. And in the special figure 2 display apparatus, the result of the 2nd special symbol lottery is displayed by the 2nd special symbol stopped and displayed.
Here, the display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the special symbol display device and the display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4 are the time when the variable display is started. The time when the stop display is started and the lottery result indicated by the stopped and displayed symbols are associated with each other.
Then, when the first special symbol (stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device becomes a specific symbol (big hit symbol), or the second special symbol (stopped on the special figure 2 display device) When the stop symbol) becomes a specific symbol (a jackpot symbol), a jackpot gaming state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated.
The general-purpose display device can perform a change display and a stop display of normal symbols made up of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, the normal symbol display device displays the result of the normal symbol lottery according to the stopped normal symbol. Then, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the general diagram display device becomes a specific symbol (per symbol per symbol), a game state per symbol which is a game state advantageous to the player is generated.
In the status display device, the number of times the display of the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is suspended (special figure 1 number of suspensions), the number of times the display of the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is suspended (special figure 2 Number of holds), the number of times the display of the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is held (ordinary number of holds), the type of jackpot gaming state (number of round games executed), instructions for launching game balls to the right path, etc. Is displayed.

The pachinko machine 1 is provided with detection sensors for detecting various abnormal states.
In this embodiment, a glass frame opening sensor 107, an inner frame opening sensor 108, a vibration detection sensor 113, a radio wave detection sensor 114, a magnetic detection sensor 115, and the like are arranged as detection sensors.
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects the opening of the integrated door unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3. The glass frame opening sensor 107 transmits a detection signal (glass frame opening signal) to the main control circuit 200 via the dispensing control board e3 in response to the opening of the integrated door unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3. To do.
The inner frame opening sensor 108 detects the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2. The inner frame opening sensor 108 transmits a detection signal (inner frame opening signal) to the main control circuit 200 via the payout control board e3 in response to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2. To do.
The vibration detection sensor 113 detects the vibration of the game board 11. In the present embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is disposed on the game board 11. Then, the vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal (board surface vibration detection sensor signal) to the main control circuit 200 in response to detection of vibration of the game board 11.
The radio wave detection sensor 114 detects radio waves generated around the game board 11. In the present embodiment, two radio wave detection sensors 114 are arranged in the game board 11. Each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal (panel radio wave detection sensor signal 1, panel radio wave detection sensor signal 2) to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the radio wave.
The magnetic detection sensor 115 detects magnetism generated around the game board 11. In the present embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is disposed in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). In the game board 11, two magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided. Then, the magnetic detection sensor 115 disposed in the inner frame unit 3 sends a detection signal (out-port magnetic detection sensor signal) to the main control circuit 200 via the payout control board e3 in response to the detection of magnetism. Send to. In addition, each magnetic detection sensor 115 disposed on the game board 11 sends a detection signal (panel magnetic detection sensor signal 1, panel magnetic detection sensor signal 2) to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of magnetism. To send.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is an address map of the memory area used by the CPU 210.
The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board e1, a sub control board e2, a payout control board e3, an inner frame board e4, an external terminal board e5, a connection board e6, a panel board e7, and the like as circuit boards.
The main control board e1, the sub control board e2, the payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, the external terminal board e5, the connection board e6, and the panel board e7 are independent (separate) circuit boards. The main control board e1, the sub control board e2, the payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, the external terminal board e5, the connection board e6, and the panel board e7 are each accommodated in individual board cases (not shown). ing.
The main control board e1, the sub control board e2, and the panel board e7 are included in the game board unit 10. Specifically, the main control board e1, the sub control board e2, and the panel board e7 are attached to the back side of the game board 11.
The payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, the external terminal board e5, and the connection board e6 are included in the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, the external terminal board e5, and the connection board e6 are attached to the back side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3.

The pachinko machine 1 includes various control circuits.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 1 supplies power (electric power) to the main control circuit 200, the effect control circuit 300, the payout control circuit 400, the control circuits 200, 300, 400, and the like. And a power supply circuit 600 to be supplied.
Each of the control circuits 200, 300, and 400 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit), a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores a program related to the progress of the game and data necessary for the progress of the game, and a CPU that is stored in the ROM. And a RAM (Random Access Memory) serving as a temporary storage area used for proceeding with processing based on a program.

The main control circuit 200 is mounted on the main control board e1. The main control circuit 200 includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, an input port 240, an output port 250, a frequency generation circuit 260, and a hard random number generation circuit 270.
The input port 240 includes a plurality of input ports (in this embodiment, input port 0 to input port 3).

The input port 0 includes a detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107 (glass frame opening signal), a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 (inner frame opening signal), and a detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113 (board surface vibration detection). Sensor signal), detection signal from one radio wave detection sensor 114 (panel surface radio wave detection sensor signal 2), detection signal from three magnetic detection sensors 115 (out mouth magnetic field detection sensor signal, panel surface magnetic field detection sensor signal 1, panel surface magnetic field) Detection sensor signal 2) and the like are input.
Detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107 (glass frame opening signal), detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 (inner frame opening signal), and from the magnetic detection sensor 115 disposed in the inner frame unit 3 The detection signal (out-port magnetic detection sensor signal) is input to the input port 0 through the payout control board e3 and the inner frame board e4.
Detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113 (board surface vibration detection sensor signal), detection signal from one radio wave detection sensor 114 (board surface radio wave detection sensor signal 2), and each magnetic detection sensor disposed on the game board 11 The detection signals (panel surface magnetic detection sensor signal 1, panel surface magnetic detection sensor signal 2) from 115 are input to the input port 0 via the panel substrate e7.

The input port 1 receives a RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch, a detection signal (not shown) from the key rotation detection switch 111, a detection signal (not shown) from the set value selection switch, and the like.
The input port 2 has a detection signal from the count switch 103, a detection signal from the right prize opening switch 105, a detection signal from the left prize opening switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, and a signal from the other radio wave detection sensor 114. A detection signal (board surface radio wave detection sensor signal 1) or the like is input.
The input port 3 receives a detection signal from the special figure 1 start port switch 101, a detection signal from the special figure 2 start port switch 102, a detection signal from the gate switch 104, and the like.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor). In each reception storage area, 1-bit data indicating a reception state of a signal corresponding to the reception storage area is set.
Specifically, each reception storage area is set to “1” when a signal corresponding to the reception storage area is input, and when a signal corresponding to the reception storage area is not input, “0” is set.

The output port 250 includes a plurality of output ports (in this embodiment, output port 0 to output port 4).
The output port 0 outputs a data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling lighting of the main display 60. The data signal output from the output port 0 is input to the source driver 510 described later.
The output port 1 outputs common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling lighting of the main display 60 and the performance display device 61. The common signal output from the output port 1 is input to a sink driver 530 described later.
The output port 2 outputs external signals (OUT1 to OUT6, OUT8). The external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer 450 via the payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, and the external terminal board e5.
External signals (OUT1 to OUT6, OUT8) output from the output port 2 are input to the hall computer 450 via the payout control board e3, the inner frame board e4, and the external terminal board e5.

The output port 3 outputs a control signal for controlling the driving of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the driving of the special prize opening solenoid 65, and the like. The control signals output from the output port 3 are input to the solenoids 64 and 65 via the panel board e7.
The output port 4 outputs a data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 61. The data signal output from the output port 4 is input to the source driver 520 described later.

The main control circuit 200 includes a command output port 1 and a command output port 2. Then, the CPU 210 transmits a control command (subcommand transmission signal) from the command output port 1 to the effect control circuit 300, and transmits a control command (payout command transmission) from the command output port 2 to the payout control circuit 400. Signal).
The command output port 1 and the command output port 2 are respectively a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), a transmission shift register (not shown), have.
The transmission data register outputs a control command input based on a subcommand transmission process (step S2-4), which will be described later, to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is composed of a plurality of registers, and can store a plurality of control commands. The FIFO buffer stores the control command input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control command to the transmission shift register in the input order.
The transmission shift register performs parallel-serial conversion on the control command input from the FIFO buffer, and transmits it to the effect control circuit 300 or the payout control circuit 400 as serial data.

Further, a test signal output circuit 900 is mounted on the main control board e1.
In the test signal management process (step S4-18) described later, the CPU 210 generates test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (big hit game state, execution state of time reduction control, probability state of special symbol lottery, etc.). The generated test signal is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from a predetermined output port.
A test signal output from a predetermined output port is input to an interface board of a test computer (not shown) via a test signal output circuit 900.
Also, a detection signal from the special figure 1 start port switch 101, a detection signal from the special figure 2 start port switch 102, a detection signal from the gate switch 104, a detection signal from the count switch 103, and a detection from the right prize opening switch 105 A signal, a detection signal from the left winning opening switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, and the like are input to the input port 240 and also to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit 900. The
Further, a control signal for controlling driving of each solenoid (normal electric accessory solenoid 64, big prize opening solenoid 65, etc.) outputted from the output port 3 is inputted to each solenoid 64, 65 and a test signal. The data is input to the interface board of the test computer via the output circuit 900.

The main control circuit 200 includes a memory area used by the CPU 210. As shown in FIG. 4, the memory area used by the CPU 210 includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230. .
Here, in FIG. 4, the address for specifying the memory area is shown in hexadecimal (“H” indicates that it is hexadecimal).

The ROM 220 (memory area of the ROM 220) is provided with a use area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and a non-use area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
The use area m1 stores (stores) a program and data for controlling the progress of the game.
The non-use area m2 includes a program and data for executing processing related to a test defined by the gaming machine rules, and a program and data for controlling display of the performance display device 61 (a program for calculating a base ratio described later) And data) are stored (stored).
The use area m1 includes a program area (0000H to 0A89H), an unused area (0A8AH to 0FFFH), and a data area (1000H to 1A7AH). In the program area, a program for controlling the progress of the game is stored. On the other hand, data for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the data area. The used area m1 may be configured without including an unused area.
In the non-use area m2, a program area (2000H to 27FFH) and a data area (2800H to 2BFFH) are provided. The program area stores a program for executing a process related to a test determined by the gaming machine rules and a program for controlling display on the performance display device 61. On the other hand, the data area stores data for executing processing related to the test determined by the gaming machine rules and data for controlling the display of the performance display device 61.
In addition to the use area m1 and the non-use area m2, the ROM 220 includes an unused area (1A7BH to 1DFFH), a ROM comment area (1E00H to 1EFFH), a program management area (2FC0H to 2FFFH), and the like. Yes.
Arbitrary data such as a program title and version is stored in the ROM comment area. On the other hand, the program management area stores information necessary for the CPU 210 to execute various programs.
In the ROM 220, an unused area m3 of a predetermined byte (for example, 4 bytes or more) is provided between the use area m1 and the non-use area m2. Thereby, the boundary between the use area m1 and the non-use area m2 is clarified.

The RAM 230 (memory area of the RAM 230) is provided with a use area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and a non-use area M2 (F210H to F228H).
The use area M1 is used when executing a process based on a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. In other words, in the use area M1, various data are temporarily stored when executing the processing based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.
The out-of-use area M2 is a process based on a program stored in the out-of-use area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test defined by the gaming machine rules or a program for controlling display of the performance display device 61). Used when executing That is, in the non-use area M2, a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test determined by the gaming machine rules or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61) When executing the processing based on the above, various data are temporarily stored.
Specifically, in the use area M1, input / output data in the main control circuit 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), flags for managing lottery results and gaming states, etc. are temporarily stored. Memorized. In particular, the use area M1 is an area for storing start information acquired in response to input of detection signals from each of the special figure 1 start opening switch 101, the special figure 2 start opening switch 102, and the gate switch 104 ( A starting information storage area (to be described later) is provided.
The use area M1 is provided with a work area (F000H to F12AH), an unused area (F12BH to F1D7H), and a stack area (F1D8H to F1FFH). The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. The used area M1 may be configured without including an unused area.
The non-use area M2 is provided with a work area (F210H to F21FH) and a stack area (F220H to F228H). The work area is executing a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test determined by the gaming machine rules or a program for controlling display of the performance display device 61). In addition, it is used as an area for temporarily storing various data. On the other hand, the stack area is executing a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test determined by the gaming machine rules or a program for controlling display of the performance display device 61). In addition, it is used as an area for temporarily saving various data.
Further, the RAM 230 is provided with an unused area M3 of a predetermined byte (4 bytes or more) between the use area M1 and the non-use area M2. Thereby, the boundary between the use area M1 and the non-use area M2 is clarified.

In particular, in the present embodiment, in processing based on a program (program for controlling the progress of a game) stored in the use area m1, it is permitted to refer to data stored in the non-use area M2. Yes.
On the other hand, it is prohibited to rewrite (change) the data stored in the non-use area M2 by the processing based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. Yes.
Further, in a process based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test determined by the gaming machine rules or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61), the use area It is permitted to refer to the data stored in M1.
On the other hand, the area used by the process based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (the program for executing the process related to the test defined by the gaming machine rules or the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61) It is prohibited to rewrite (change) the data stored in M1.
The game in the pachinko machine 1 can be advanced (completed) by a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1.

The frequency generation circuit 260 generates a clock (synchronization signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (in this embodiment, 12 [MHz]), and outputs this clock to each of the CPU 210 and the hard random number generation circuit 270.
A hard random number generation circuit 270 generates a first loop counter that generates a random number for a normal symbol lottery, a second loop counter that generates a big random number for a first special symbol lottery, and a big hit random number for a second special symbol lottery. The third loop counter includes a fourth loop counter that generates a reach group random number.
Each time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260, the first loop counter updates the value of the loop counter one by one within a predetermined range (in the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment). A random number is generated per normal symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
Each time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260, the second loop counter updates the value of the loop counter one by one within a predetermined range (in the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment). A big hit random number of the first special symbol lottery is generated. In the present embodiment, the value of the second loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
Each time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260, the third loop counter updates the value of the loop counter one by one within a predetermined range (in the range of 0 to 65535 in this embodiment). A big hit random number of the second special symbol lottery is generated. In the present embodiment, the value of the third loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
Each time 32 clocks are input from the frequency generation circuit 260 (once every time the clock frequency is divided by 32), the fourth loop counter sets the value of the loop counter within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, 0 to 10006). Reach group random numbers are generated by updating one by one in the range. In the present embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 [μs] (32 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 2.666 [μs]).

The main control board e1 is provided with a set value operation unit (not shown). The set value operation unit includes a key rotation detection switch 111, a set value selection switch 112, and a set value display device 62.
The key rotation detection switch 111 has an operation unit that can be switched between a setting permission state and a setting prohibition state. The key rotation detection switch 111 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 when the operation unit is switched to the setting permission state. On the other hand, the key rotation detection switch 111 stops outputting the detection signal to the main control circuit 200 when the operation unit is switched to the setting prohibited state.
In the present embodiment, a keyhole into which a dedicated key is inserted is provided in the operation unit of the key rotation detection switch 111. In the key rotation detection switch 111, the state of the operation unit (setting permitted state or setting prohibited state) can be switched by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole. That is, in the key rotation detection switch 111, the state of the operation unit (setting permission state or setting prohibition state) cannot be switched unless a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole.
Further, in the key rotation detection switch 111, it is possible to insert a dedicated key into the keyhole when the operation unit is in a setting prohibited state, and it is possible to remove the dedicated key from the keyhole. On the other hand, with the key rotation detection switch 111, it is impossible to insert a dedicated key into the keyhole when the operation unit is in a setting-permitted state, and it is impossible to remove the dedicated key from the keyhole. Become.
The set value selection switch 112 has an operation unit that can be pressed. The set value selection switch 112 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 every time the operation unit is pressed.
The set value display device 62 is configured by a 7-segment LED or the like. The set value display device 62 displays a set value to be described later. The set value display device 62 is arranged on the back side of the game board 11 so that it cannot be viewed by the player.

Here, the setting information (setting value) set in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The “setting information” is information for designating the winning probability (probability of winning the big hit gaming state) of the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery).
The RAM of the main control circuit 200 is provided with a setting information storage area. In the setting information storage area, any one of “1” to “6” is set (stored) as setting information. And in the pachinko machine 1, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set to a probability according to the value set in the setting information storage area.
In the following description, the value stored in the setting information storage area is referred to as “setting value”.
In the present embodiment, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery corresponding to each setting value is the winning probability corresponding to the setting value = “6” and the winning probability corresponding to the setting value = “5” in descending order of the winning probability. , Winning probability corresponding to setting value = “4”, winning probability corresponding to setting value = “3”, winning probability corresponding to setting value = “2”, winning probability corresponding to setting value = “1” (winning Probability “high” → winning probability “low”).

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the set value can be changed (selected) when the power is turned on. Here, the change of the set value is executed by an administrator of the pachinko machine 1 (such as an employee of a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed).
In the pachinko machine 1, the set value change permission state is started in response to the power being turned on while the operation unit of the key rotation detection switch 111 is displaced to the setting permission state.
During the setting value change permission state, the setting value display device 62 displays a value indicating a value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area.
In the setting value change permission state, each time the setting value selection switch 112 is pressed, the value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area is changed. At this time, when the value (set value) set in the setting information storage area is changed, the value (value indicating the set value) displayed on the set value display device 62 is also changed accordingly. Be changed.
As a result, the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 sets a desired value among “1” to “6” as a setting value by pressing the setting value selection switch 112 while the setting value change permission state is set. (Select).
Then, in the pachinko machine 1, the setting value change permission state is terminated in response to the operation unit of the key rotation detection switch 111 being switched from the setting permission state to the setting prohibition state. This makes it impossible to change the value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area. Further, the display of the value indicating the set value on the set value display device 62 is ended according to the end of the set value change permission state.

The main control board e1 is provided with a performance display device 61. The performance display device 61 is arranged on the back side of the game board 11 so that it cannot be viewed by the player.
The performance display device 61 includes a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is configured by a light emitting element (in the present embodiment, an LED).
In the performance display device 61, the number of game balls launched into the game area 30 and a predetermined entrance (in this embodiment, the first start port 51, the second start port 52, and other winning ports 54 to 57). Information (base ratio described later) calculated based on the number of prize balls paid out in accordance with the entry of game balls into the game is displayed.
The performance display device 61 includes four (four digits) display units (not shown). Each display unit is composed of eight lighting elements. That is, each display unit is composed of a 7-segment LED that can display numbers, symbols, and the like, and a dot-segment LED that can display dots such as a decimal point.
Specifically, the performance display device 61 includes 32 lighting elements (LED33 to LED64). In the performance display device 61, the LEDs 33 to 40 are the first digit display unit, the LED 41 to LED48 are the second digit display unit, the LED 49 to LED56 are the third digit display unit, and the LED 57 to LED64. Is the fourth digit display.
The main control circuit 200 calculates a base ratio, which will be described later, during the occurrence of a predetermined gaming state (in this embodiment, during the occurrence of the special figure low probability state and during the stop of the short-time control). Then, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 61.
“Base ratio” is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts to the number of outballs. The main control circuit 200 calculates a base ratio for each predetermined section (period).
In the present embodiment, a section in which a predetermined number (60000 [sphere] in the present embodiment) of out balls is detected (discharged) is defined as the predetermined section. That is, each section starts in response to the end of the previous section, and ends in response to the number of out balls detected in the current section reaching a predetermined number (60000 [sphere]). The main control circuit 200 calculates the base ratio at any time (in real time) during each section.
Here, a predetermined time may be defined as the predetermined section. That is, the main control circuit 200 may be configured to calculate the base ratio for each predetermined time.
“Number of out balls” refers to the number of out balls. “Out ball” refers to a game ball discharged from the game area 30. In the present embodiment, the out ball refers to a game ball (game ball detected by the out switch 109) that has passed through the discharge path.
Here, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 may be an out ball. Specifically, the out switch 109 may be configured to detect only the game balls discharged from the out port 58, and the game balls detected by the out switch 109 may be set as the out balls.
The “number of payouts” refers to the total number of winning balls paid out according to the number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 51, the second starting port 52, and the other winning ports 54 to 57.
The performance display device 61 alternately displays the first base ratio and the second base ratio every predetermined time (5.0 [s] in the present embodiment).
The “first base ratio” is the base ratio of the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the current time).
The “second base ratio” is the base ratio of the previous section (the final base ratio calculated for the previous section).
Specifically, in the performance display device 61, information for identifying the type of the base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio) by the upper two-digit display section of the four-digit display section. Is displayed. In the performance display device 61, the base ratio (percentage) is displayed by the lower two digits of the four digits display.

The effect control circuit 300 is mounted on the sub control board e2.
The effect control circuit 300 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input port, and an output port.
Based on the control command received from the main control circuit 200, the effect control circuit 300 displays effect images on the image display devices 31 and 32, lights the lamps 20 and 21, outputs sounds by the sound generator 22, and various types. It controls the drive of a motor (not shown) that drives the movable body.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a program related to the progress of the effect, data necessary for the progress of the effect, and the like.
The RAM of the effect control circuit 300 temporarily stores control commands received from the main control circuit 200, data for performing arithmetic processing, and the like.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 determines the content of the effect to be executed based on the control command received from the main control circuit 200. Then, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, motor control data, and the like are generated in accordance with an effect program (effect control table) corresponding to the content of the determined effect. And the control signal based on each produced | generated control data is output with respect to each image display apparatuses 31 and 32, the sound generator 22, each lamp | ramp 20, 21, each motor, etc. FIG.

The payout control circuit 400 is mounted on the payout control board e3.
The payout control circuit 400 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input port, and an output port.
The payout control circuit 400 controls the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 based on the detection signal input from the launch volume.
Specifically, the payout control circuit 400 controls the launch operation of the game ball by the game ball launching device 430 so that the game ball is launched into the game area 30 with a strength according to the detection signal input from the launch volume. To do.
Also, the payout control circuit 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 based on the control command received from the main control circuit 200 and the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit 500.
Specifically, the ball lending button 7a transmits a ball lending operation signal to the CR unit 500 via the connection board e6 in response to the pressing operation. When the CR unit 500 receives the ball lending operation signal, the CR unit 500 subtracts the frequency necessary for paying out a predetermined number of balls from the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the inserted prepaid card, The record of the remaining frequency of the valuable medium in the prepaid card is updated, and a ball lending instruction signal instructing to pay out a predetermined number of game balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400 via the connection board e6. Further, when the payout control circuit 400 receives the ball lending instruction signal, the payout control circuit 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 so as to pay out a predetermined number of game balls.
When the prepaid cart is inserted and the record of the remaining frequency of the valuable medium in the prepaid card is updated, the CR unit 500 sends a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium via the connection board e6. It transmits with respect to the display apparatus 7c. When the frequency signal is received, the frequency display device 7c displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium indicated by the frequency signal.
The return button 7b transmits a return operation signal to the CR unit 500 via the connection board e6 in response to the pressing operation. When receiving the return operation signal, the CR unit 500 returns (discharges) the prepaid card in which the remaining frequency of the valuable medium remains.

Next, specific configurations of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 61 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main display and the performance display device.
As shown in FIG. 5, the main display 60 includes 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32). The performance display device 61 includes 32 lighting elements (LED33 to LED64).
Then, the CPU 210 drives the lighting elements (LED1 to LED32) included in the main display 60 and the lighting elements (LED33 to LED64) included in the performance display device 61 by dynamic lighting control.
Specifically, a source driver (segment driver) 510, a source driver (segment driver) 520, and a sink driver (common driver) 530 are mounted on the main control board e1.

The source driver 510 controls lighting of the lighting elements (LED1 to LED32) included in the main display device 60.
The source driver 510 includes eight transistors TR1 to TR8. Each of the transistors TR1 to TR8 is an NPN type transistor.
The power supply voltage Vcc is applied from the power supply circuit 600 to the collector electrodes of the transistors TR1 to TR8. Further, data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) are input from the CPU 210 (output port 0) to the base electrodes of the transistors TR1 to TR8.

A data signal line DL1 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR1 through a resistor. The anode electrodes of LED1, LED9, LED17, and LED25 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL1.
Thus, when a data signal (“SEGDATA0”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR1 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL1. On the other hand, when the data signal (“SEGDATA0”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR1 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL1.
A data signal line DL2 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR2 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of LED2, LED10, LED18, and LED26 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL2.
Thus, when the data signal (“SEGDATA1”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR2 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL2. On the other hand, when the data signal (“SEGDATA1”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR2 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL2.
A data signal line DL3 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR3 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of LED3, LED11, LED19, and LED27 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL3.
Thus, when the data signal (“SEGDATA2”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR3 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL3. On the other hand, when the data signal (“SEGDATA2”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR3 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL3.
A data signal line DL4 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR4 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of LED4, LED12, LED20, and LED28 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL4.
Thus, when the data signal (“SEGDATA3”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR4 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL4. On the other hand, when the data signal (“SEGDATA3”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR4 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL4.

A data signal line DL5 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR5 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of LED5, LED13, LED21, and LED29 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL5.
Thus, when the data signal (“SEGDATA4”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR5 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL5. On the other hand, when the data signal (“SEGDATA4”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR5 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL5.
The data signal line DL6 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR6 through a resistor. The anode electrodes of LED6, LED14, LED22, and LED30 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL6.
Thus, when the data signal (“SEGDATA5”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR6 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL6. On the other hand, when the data signal (“SEGDATA5”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR6 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL6.
The data signal line DL7 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR7 through a resistor. The anode electrodes of LED7, LED15, LED23, and LED31 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL7.
Thus, when the data signal (“SEGDATA6”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR7 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL7. On the other hand, when the data signal (“SEGDATA6”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR7 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL7.
A data signal line DL8 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR8 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of LED8, LED16, LED24, and LED32 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL8.
Thus, when a data signal (“SEGDATA7”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR8 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL8. On the other hand, when the data signal (“SEGDATA7”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR8 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL8.

The source driver 520 controls lighting of the lighting elements (LED33 to LED64) included in the performance display device 61.
The source driver 520 includes eight transistors TR9 to TR16. Each of the transistors TR9 to TR16 is an NPN type transistor.
The power supply voltage Vcc is applied from the power supply circuit 600 to the collector electrodes of the transistors TR9 to TR16. A data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) is input from the CPU 210 (output port 4) to the base electrodes of the transistors TR9 to TR16.

A data signal line DL9 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR9 through a resistor. And the anode electrode of LED33, LED41, LED49, LED57 is electrically connected to data signal line DL9.
Thus, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA0”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR9 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL9. On the other hand, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA0”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR9 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL9.
The data signal line DL10 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR10 through a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED 34, LED 42, LED 50, and LED 58 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL10.
Thus, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA1”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR10 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL10. On the other hand, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA1”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR10 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL10.
A data signal line DL11 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR11 via a resistor. And the anode electrode of LED35, LED43, LED51, and LED59 is electrically connected to the data signal line DL11.
Thus, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA2”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR11 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL11. On the other hand, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA2”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR11 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL11.
A data signal line DL12 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR12 via a resistor. And the anode electrode of LED36, LED44, LED52, and LED60 is electrically connected to the data signal line DL12.
Thus, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA3”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR12 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL12. On the other hand, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA3”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR12 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL12.

A data signal line DL13 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR13 via a resistor. And the anode electrode of LED37, LED45, LED53, LED61 is electrically connected to the data signal line DL13.
Thus, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA4”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR13 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL13. On the other hand, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA4”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR13 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL13.
A data signal line DL14 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR14 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of the LED 38, LED 46, LED 54, and LED 62 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL14.
Thus, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA5”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR14 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL14. On the other hand, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA5”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR14 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL14.
The data signal line DL15 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR15 via a resistor. The anode electrodes of LED39, LED47, LED55, and LED63 are electrically connected to the data signal line DL15.
Thus, when a data signal (“7SEGDATA6”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR15 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL15. On the other hand, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA6”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR15 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL15.
A data signal line DL16 is electrically connected to the emitter electrode of the transistor TR16 via a resistor. And the anode electrode of LED40, LED48, LED56, LED64 is electrically connected to the data signal line DL16.
Thus, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA7”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR16 (when the data signal becomes high level), the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line DL16. On the other hand, when the data signal (“7SEGDATA7”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR16 (when the data signal becomes low level), the power supply voltage Vcc is not applied to the data signal line CL16.

The sink driver 530 controls lighting of the lighting elements (LED1 to LED32) included in the main display 60 and the lighting elements (LED33 to LED64) included in the performance display device 61.
The sink driver 530 includes four transistors TR17 to TR20. Each of the transistors TR17 to TR20 is an NPN type transistor.
The emitter electrodes of the transistors TR17 to TR20 are electrically connected to the ground terminal of the power supply circuit 600. Further, common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) are input from the CPU 210 (output port 1) to the base electrodes of the transistors TR17 to TR20.

A common signal line CL1 is electrically connected to a collector electrode of the transistor TR17. The common signal line CL1 is electrically connected to the cathode electrodes of the LEDs 1 to LED8 (lighting element group a) of the main display 60 and the LEDs 33 to LED40 (lighting element group A) of the performance display device 61. ing.
Thus, when a common signal (“COM0”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR17 (when the common signal becomes high level), the common signal line CL1 is grounded to the ground terminal. On the other hand, if the common signal (“COM0”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR17 (when the common signal becomes low level), the common signal line CL1 is not grounded to the ground terminal.
The common signal line CL2 is electrically connected to the collector electrode of the transistor TR18. The common signal line CL2 is electrically connected to the LED 9 to LED 16 (lighting element group b) of the main display 60 and the cathode electrodes of the LED 41 to LED 48 (lighting element group B) of the performance display device 61. ing.
Thus, when the common signal (“COM1”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR18 (when the common signal becomes high level), the common signal line CL2 is grounded to the ground terminal. On the other hand, when the common signal (“COM1”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR18 (when the common signal becomes low level), the common signal line CL2 is not grounded to the ground terminal.
A common signal line CL3 is electrically connected to the collector electrode of the transistor TR19. The common signal line CL3 is electrically connected to the cathode electrodes of the LEDs 17 to 24 (lighting element group c) of the main display 60 and the LEDs 49 to 56 (lighting element group C) of the performance display device 61. ing.
Thus, when a common signal (“COM2”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR19 (when the common signal becomes high level), the common signal line CL3 is grounded to the ground terminal. On the other hand, if the common signal (“COM2”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR19 (when the common signal becomes low level), the common signal line CL3 is not grounded to the ground terminal.
A common signal line CL4 is electrically connected to the collector electrode of the transistor TR20. The common signal line CL4 is electrically connected to the LED25 to LED32 (lighting element group d) of the main display 60 and the cathode electrodes of the LED57 to LED64 (lighting element group D) of the performance display device 61. ing.
Thus, when the common signal (“COM3”) is input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR20 (when the common signal becomes high level), the common signal line CL4 is grounded to the ground terminal. On the other hand, if the common signal (“COM3”) is not input from the CPU 210 to the transistor TR20 (when the common signal becomes low level), the common signal line CL4 is not grounded to the ground terminal.

The sink driver 530 has a function of selecting a lighting element group (lighting element group) that can be turned on.
In the present embodiment, the first lighting element group corresponding to the transistor TR17 (common signal line CL1), the second lighting element group corresponding to the transistor TR18 (common signal line CL2), and the transistor TR19 (common signal line CL3). A corresponding third lighting element group and a fourth lighting element group corresponding to the transistor TR20 (common signal line CL4) are configured.
The first lighting element group includes LED1 to LED8 (lighting element group a) of the main display 60 and LED33 to LED40 (lighting element group A) of the performance display device 61.
The second lighting element group includes LED 9 to LED 16 (lighting element group b) of the main display 60 and LED 41 to LED 48 (lighting element group B) of the performance display device 61.
The third lighting element group includes LED 17 to LED 24 (lighting element group c) of the main display 60 and LED 49 to LED 56 (lighting element group C) of the performance display device 61.
The fourth lighting element group includes LED25 to LED32 (lighting element group d) of the main display 60, and LED57 to LED64 (lighting element group D) of the performance display device 61.
All the lighting elements included in each of the first lighting element group to the fourth lighting element group are electrically connected to a common signal line corresponding to the lighting element group. That is, each lighting element (LED1 to LED8, LED33 to LED40) included in the first lighting element group is electrically connected to the common signal line CL1. Each lighting element (LED9 to LED16, LED41 to LED48) included in the second lighting element group is electrically connected to the common signal line CL2. Each lighting element (LED17 to LED24, LED49 to LED56) included in the third lighting element group is electrically connected to the common signal line CL3. Each lighting element (LED25-LED32, LED57-LED64) included in the fourth lighting element group is electrically connected to the common signal line CL4.
The CPU 210 outputs a common signal to any one of the transistors TR17 to TR20 (the common signal is set to a high level). Then, the CPU 210 sequentially switches a transistor that outputs a common signal (sets the common signal to a high level) among the transistors TR17 to TR20 at a predetermined cycle.
Specifically, each time a dynamic port output process (step S4-4) described later is executed, a transistor that outputs a common signal (sets the common signal to a high level) among the transistors TR17 to TR20 is predetermined. Are switched in this order.
Thus, each time the dynamic port output process (step S4-4) is executed, the common signal line grounded to the ground terminal among the common signal lines CL1 to CL4 is switched in a predetermined order.
That is, the sink driver 530 grounds and grounds one common signal line among the common signal lines CL1 to CL4 according to the common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) input from the CPU 210. The lighting element group corresponding to the common signal line can be turned on.

On the other hand, each of the source drivers 510 and 520 selects a lighting element to be lit among a plurality of lighting elements included in the lighting element group (first lighting element group to fourth lighting element group) selected by the sink driver 530. It has a function.
As described above, each lighting element group (the first lighting element group to the fourth lighting element group) includes 16 lighting elements. The 16 lighting elements included in each lighting element group (first lighting element group to fourth lighting element group) are electrically connected to different data signal lines (transistors TR1 to TR16).
Then, the CPU 210 turns on (drives) among the lighting elements connected to the one common signal line during the period in which one of the common signal lines CL1 to CL4 is grounded. ) A data signal is output to the transistors TR1 to TR16 corresponding to the lighting elements to be set (the data signal is set to the high level).
Specifically, a common signal is output to one of the transistors TR17 to TR20 by the dynamic port output process (step S4-4), and the common grounded by the output of the common signal. Of the lighting elements connected to the signal line, a data signal is output to the transistors TR1 to TR16 corresponding to the lighting elements to be lit.
As a result, the power supply voltage Vcc is applied to the data signal line corresponding to the lighting element to be lit among the lighting elements connected to the common signal line grounded according to the output of the common signal. Then, a current flows through the lighting element to be lit, and the lighting element is lit.
As described above, the combination of the common data for selecting the common signal line to be grounded and the segment data for selecting the data signal line to which the power supply voltage Vcc is applied enables the LEDs 1 to 64 to be driven by dynamic lighting control. Become.
In particular, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a source driver 510 corresponding to the main display device 60 and a source driver 520 corresponding to the performance display device 61. The source driver 510 controls application of the power supply voltage Vcc to the data signal lines DL1 to DL8 included in the main display 60. On the other hand, the source driver 520 controls application of the power supply voltage Vcc to the data signal lines DL9 to DL16 included in the performance display device 61. As a result, the application of the power supply bill Vcc to the data signal line is individually controlled by the main display 60 and the performance display device 61.
On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a common sink driver 530 for the main display 60 and the performance display device 61. Further, a lighting element group (lighting element group) constituting the main display 60 and a performance display device 61 include lighting element groups (first lighting element group to fourth lighting element group) corresponding to the common signal lines CL1 to CL4. And a lighting element (lighting element group) constituting the. That is, the lighting elements (lighting element group) constituting the main display 60 and the lighting elements (lighting element group) constituting the performance display device 61 are electrically connected to the common signal lines CL1 to CL4. Yes. The sink driver 530 controls the grounding of the common signal lines CL1 to CL4. Thereby, the grounding of the common signal line is collectively controlled by the main display device 60 and the performance display device 61.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, it is not necessary to provide the sink driver 530 corresponding to each of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 61. As a result, the output port (corresponding to each of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 61) There is no need to provide an output port for outputting a common signal.
Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the number of parts required for lighting control of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 61.
Further, in the main control circuit 200 (CPU 210), it is not necessary to generate a common signal corresponding to each of the main display 60 and the performance display device 61, and control for controlling the lighting of the main display 60 and the performance display device 61. The load can be reduced.

(About various lotteries)
Next, various lotteries executed by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the normal symbol lottery is executed with the passage of the start gate 41 by a game ball as an opportunity. When a normal symbol lottery is won, a gaming state is generated per regular drawing. In the normal game state, the ordinary electric accessory 52a is displaced (opened) from the closed state to the open state, so that the game ball can enter the second start port 52.
In the present embodiment, one type of “per ordinary figure” is set as the type of game state per ordinary figure that occurs when the normal symbol lottery is won.

In the case of winning the “per symbol” (winning the normal symbol lottery), the normal symbol display device controls the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed as “per symbol”.
On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is lost, the normal symbol display device controls the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed as “offset symbol”.
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute time reduction control as auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
During execution of the time reduction control, the time for displaying the variation of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “variation time”) is shortened as compared to when the time reduction control is stopped. In the present embodiment, during the execution of the time reduction control, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is improved and the time for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is shortened as compared to when the time reduction control is stopped. In addition, during the execution of the time reduction control, the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is increased in the game state per drawing as compared to when the time reduction control is stopped, and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is increased. Extended.
In the case of winning the “per normal”, the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set to 1 [times] or 3 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each time is 0.5. [S] or 2.0 [s] is set. At this time, during the execution of the short-time control, the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set to 3 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each time is set to 2.0 [s]. Is set. On the other hand, while the short-time control is stopped, the number of times of opening the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set to 1 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each time is set to 0.5 [s]. Is done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the first special symbol lottery is executed in response to the game ball entering the first start port 51, and the second ball is input in response to the game ball entering the second start port 52. A special symbol lottery is executed. When the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is won, a big hit gaming state is generated. In the big hit game state, a round game in which the special electric accessory 53a is displaced from the closed state to the open state is executed, and the game ball can enter the big winning opening 53.
In the present embodiment, “big hit 1” and “big hit 2” are set as winning types (type of big hit gaming state) that can be selected when the result of the first special symbol lottery becomes “big hit”. As the winning types (types of jackpot gaming state) that can be selected when the result of the special symbol lottery is “big hit”, “big hit 3” and “big hit 4” are defined.

When the “big hit 1” is won, the special symbol 1 display device stops and displays the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “big hit one symbol”. In the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “probability variable symbol” is stopped and displayed.
Here, the “probable change symbol” is the same as the first effect symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, for example, “7, 7, 7”, etc. A display mode in which “numbered symbols” indicating odd numbers are arranged and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 indicates a predetermined color.
When the “big hit 2” is won, the special symbol 1 display device stops and displays the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “big hit 2 symbols”. In the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “normal symbol” is stopped and displayed.
Here, the “normal symbol” is the same as the first effect symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, for example, “2, 2, 2”, etc. A display mode in which “number symbols” indicating even numbers are arranged and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 indicates a predetermined color.
When the “big hit 3” is won, the special symbol 2 display device stops and displays the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “big hit 3 symbols”. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “bonus symbol” is stopped and displayed.
Here, the “bonus symbol” is the same as the first effect symbol z1, which is stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, for example, “1, 1, 1”, etc. A display mode in which the second effect symbols z2 stopped in the second effect symbol display area a4 are displayed in a predetermined color is arranged with “numeric symbols” indicating numbers.
When the “big hit 4” is won, the special symbol 2 display device stops and displays the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “big hit 4 symbols”. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “bonus symbol” is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, when the special symbol lottery is lost (in the case of “missing”), on the display devices 61 and 62, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “missing symbol” is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the “missing symbol” is stopped and displayed.
Here, for example, the “offset symbol” indicates that the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is stopped and displayed in at least one area such as “1, 6, 9”, etc. The number indicated by the “numerical symbol” is a combination different from the number indicated by the “numerical symbol” stopped and displayed in another area, and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. Is a display mode showing a predetermined color.

In the case of winning from “big hit 1” to “big hit 4”, a predetermined number of round games are executed in the big hit gaming state.
In the present embodiment, when the “big hit 1” or “big hit 2” is won, the number of round games is set to 5 [times]. On the other hand, in the case of winning “big hit 3” or “big hit 4”, the number of round games is set to 15 [times].
When winning from “big hit 1” to “big hit 3”, the longest opening time of the special electric accessory 53a in each round game is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment). The In each round game, the longest open time set after the special electric accessory 53a is opened, and the number of game balls entering the big prize opening 53 in the round game is The process is terminated when one of the predetermined upper limit numbers (10 [sphere] in the present embodiment) has been reached.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as the gaming state relating to the winning probability of the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery), the “special symbol low probability state”, the “special symbol high probability state”, Is stipulated.
During the occurrence of the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set to the first probability (hereinafter referred to as “low probability”).
During the occurrence of the “special drawing high probability state”, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set to a second probability higher than the first probability (hereinafter referred to as “high probability”).
The main control circuit 200 sets the winning probability of each lottery so that the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery is synchronized with the winning probability of the second special symbol lottery. Here, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery means the probability of winning the “hit” (“hit 1” to “hit 3”) in which the big hit gaming state occurs.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is a set of a value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area and a gaming state (a special figure low probability state or a special figure high probability state). Probability according to the match.

Specifically, during the occurrence of the set value = “1” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 319.69. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “1” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 32.13.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “2” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 312.08. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “2” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery becomes 1 / 31.36.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “3” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery becomes 1 / 304.82. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “3” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery becomes 1 / 30.62.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “4” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 297.89. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the setting value = “4” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 29.93.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “5” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 291.27. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “5” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 29.26.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “6” and the “special figure low probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 284.94. On the other hand, during the occurrence of the set value = “6” and the “special figure high probability state”, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 28.62.

In the case of winning “big hit 2” or “big hit 4”, a “special figure low probability state” is generated in accordance with the end of the big hit gaming state.
On the other hand, when “big hit 1” or “big hit 3” is won, a “special figure high probability state” is generated in accordance with the end of the big hit gaming state. Then, the “special figure high probability state” is terminated in response to winning of the winning type (specifically, “big hit 2” or “big hit 4”) that causes the “special figure low probability state”.
In particular, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a limiter function. The “limiter function” is a function that limits the number of winnings in succession to the winning type (“big hit 1” or “big hit 3”) that causes the “special figure high probability state”.
Specifically, the main control circuit 200 includes a limiter number counter. The limiter count counter counts the limiter count. The “number of limiters” is the number of times that the winning type (“big hit 1” or “big hit 3”) that causes the “special figure high probability state” can be continuously won (the remaining number of times).
In the present embodiment, the winning type ("big hit 1" or "big hit 3") that causes the "high figure probability state" to be generated by the special symbol lottery (start determination) executed during the occurrence of the "special figure low probability state". In the case of winning, a predetermined limiter number (3 [times] in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the limiter number counter.
Also, at the end of the big hit gaming state corresponding to the winning type (“big hit 1” or “big hit 3”) that causes the “special figure high probability state”, “1” is subtracted from the value of the limiter count counter. At this time, when the value of the limiter number counter after subtraction becomes “0”, the operation of the limiter function is started.
And if you win a “big hit” by a special symbol lottery (start determination) executed while the limiter function is in operation, the winning type that will cause the “special figure low probability state” to occur (be sure to 2 ”or“ Big hit 4 ”) is selected.
As a result, in this embodiment, it is possible to continuously win the winning type ("big hit 1" or "big hit 3") that causes the "special figure high probability state" with an upper limit of 3 [times]. Become.
In the present embodiment, the winning type (“big hit 2”) that causes the “special figure low probability state” is won by the special symbol lottery (start determination) executed during the occurrence of the “special figure high probability state”. In this case, even if the value of the limiter number counter is “1” or more, the “special figure low probability state” is generated in accordance with the end of the big hit gaming state.

In addition, when winning from “big hit 1” to “big hit 4”, the time reduction control is executed after the big hit gaming state ends.
The time reduction control is started in response to the end of the big hit gaming state. The time-saving control includes (1) winning the “big hit” (“big hit symbol” is stopped and displayed) and (2) special symbol notification display (variation display and stop display). When the number of times has been reached, one of the conditions is satisfied.
In the present embodiment, when “big hit 2” or “big hit 4” is won, 100 [times] is set as the number of time reductions. On the other hand, when winning “big hit 1” or “big hit 3”, 10000 [times] is set as the number of time reductions.

(About control commands)
Next, control commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300 and control commands transmitted / received between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 will be described.
The main control circuit 200 and the effect control circuit 300 are connected to each other via a serial communication harness. Here, communication between the main control circuit 200 and the effect control circuit 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300, and communication from the effect control circuit 300 to the main control circuit 200 is performed. Not done.
Each control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300 is composed of 1-byte upper data indicating the type of the control command and 1-byte lower data indicating the contents of the control command. Yes.
Then, the main control circuit 200 transmits a control command composed of upper data and lower data to the effect control circuit 300 by serial communication. In the effect control circuit 300, when a control command is received from the main control circuit 200, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, as control commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300, a symbol type designation command, a variation mode designation command, a variation pattern designation command, a stop designation command, a game state designation command, the number of holds A designation command, an opening designation command, a round start designation command, a round end designation command, an ending designation command, a first prefetch designation command, a second prefetch designation command, a third prefetch designation command, and the like are set.
The symbol type designation command is a command for designating the type of stop symbol (one of the “missing symbol” and “one jackpot symbol” to “four jackpot symbols”). The symbol type designation command is transmitted when the special symbol variable display is started. In the present embodiment, symbols corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are set as the symbol type designation command.

The variation mode designation command is a command for designating the type of variation mode (variation mode number). The variation mode designation command designates the variation time associated with the variation mode number by designating the variation mode number. The variation mode designation command designates the variation time of the first half period (a mode of the first half period of the variation effect) of the special symbol variation display (variation effect).
In the present embodiment, m (plural) types of variation modes associated with different variation times are set as the variation mode types. The variation mode designation command designates one of the m types of variation modes (variation mode number) (“variation mode m”).
The variation pattern designation command is a command for designating a variation pattern type (variation pattern number). The variation pattern designation command designates the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by designating the variation pattern number. The variation pattern designation command designates the variation time of the latter half period (the aspect of the second half period of the variation effect) of the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol.
In the present embodiment, n (plural) types of variation patterns associated with different variation times are set as the variation pattern types. Then, the variation pattern designation command designates one of the n types of variation patterns (variation pattern number) (“variation pattern n”).
The variation mode designation command and the variation pattern designation command are transmitted at the start of variation display of the special symbol.

The stop designation command is a command for designating stop display of a special symbol (effect symbols z1, z2). The stop designation command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol stop display.
The game state designation command is a command for designating a game state (game state offset value).
Here, the “gaming state offset value” is information for designating the gaming state. In the present embodiment, as the gaming state offset value, each of the combinations of the value of the short-time control flag, the value of the special figure high probability state flag, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag, and the value of the big hit after rotation counter Corresponding numerical value is set.
The gaming state designation command designates one gaming state offset value. The game state designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on or when a special game phase to be described later is changed.
Here, as the gaming state offset value, the value of the short time control flag, the value of the special figure high probability state flag, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag, the value of the big hit after rotation counter, and the setting information storage area are stored. A numerical value corresponding to each of the combinations of the values (set values) being set may be set. Then, when transmitting the game state designation command, the value of the short time control flag, the value of the special figure high probability state flag, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag, the rotation number after the big hit, which are set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 Checking the counter value and the value stored in the setting information storage area, calculating a gaming state offset value corresponding to the confirmation result, and a gaming state designation command for designating the calculated gaming state offset value The sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 may be stored (transmitted to the effect control circuit 300).

The hold number designation command is a command for designating the hold number. In the present embodiment, the number-of-holds designation command designates that the number of holds (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) has increased by “1”, that the hold number has decreased by “1”, the hold number, etc. .
Here, the “special figure 1 hold number” refers to the number of notification display (variation display and stop display) of the first special symbol on the special figure 1 display device. Also, the “special figure 2 hold number” means the number of the second special symbol notification display (fluctuation display and stop display) held on the special figure 2 display device.
The number-of-holds designation command is transmitted when power is turned on, when starting information is stored, when a special symbol variation display is started, or the like. In the present embodiment, commands corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are set as the hold number designation commands.

The opening designation command is a command for designating the start of the opening period (start of the big hit gaming state). The opening designation command designates the type of the big hit gaming state to be started (= type of stop symbol (one type of “one big hit symbol” to “four big hit symbols”)). The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (at the start of the big hit gaming state).
The round start designation command is a command for designating the start of a round game. The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of the round game.
The round end designation command is a command for designating the end of the round game. The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of the round game.
The ending designation command is a command for designating the start of the ending period. The ending designation command is transmitted at the start of the ending period.

The first look-ahead designation command is a command for designating a stop symbol type (one of the “missing symbol” and “one jackpot symbol” to “four jackpot symbols”). In the present embodiment, the first prefetch designation command is set corresponding to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The second prefetch designation command is a command for designating the contents of the variation mode. Specifically, the second look-ahead designation command indicates that the type of variation mode is undefined (“undefined value”), or one of m types of variation modes (variation mode number) (“variation mode m”). ) Is specified. The second prefetch designation command is transmitted when starting information is stored.
The third prefetch designation command is a command for designating the contents of the variation pattern. Specifically, the third look-ahead designation command indicates that the type of variation pattern is undefined (“undefined value”) or one of n types of variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) (“variation pattern n”). ) Is specified. The third prefetch designation command is transmitted when starting information is stored.

The main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 is performed in both directions. Each control command transmitted / received between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 is composed of 1-byte data.
The main control circuit 200 transmits a control command to the payout control circuit 400 by serial communication. In the payout control circuit 400, when a control command is received from the main control circuit 200, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the data of the control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing. Also, the payout control circuit 400 transmits a control command to the main control circuit 200 by serial communication. When receiving a control command from the payout control circuit 400, the main control circuit 200 generates a serial communication reception interrupt, and stores the data of the control command in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 by this interrupt processing.
In the pachinko machine 1, a prize ball number designation command or the like is set as a control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the payout control circuit 400.
The prize ball number designation command is a command for designating the number of prize balls to be paid out. In the present embodiment, the prize ball number designation command designates the payout of n (n = 1 to 15) prize balls. The award ball number designation command is transmitted when the award ball payout operation is executed by the payout control circuit 400.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, control commands transmitted from the payout control circuit 400 to the main control circuit 200 include occurrence / release of payout errors, occurrence / release of full tank errors, occurrence / release of ball clogging errors, etc. Control commands that specify each are set. Each control command is transmitted upon detection of occurrence / release of various errors.

(Processing executed by main control circuit 200)
Next, processing executed by the main control circuit 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured in the main control circuit 200 will be described.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the hard random number generation circuit 270 starts a hard random number update process.
In the hard random number update process, every time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260 (in this embodiment, every 0.083 [μs]), the values of the first to third loop counters are within a predetermined range. Within the range (in the range of 0 to 65535 in the present embodiment) by one.
Also, in the hard random number update process, every time 32 clocks are input from the frequency generation circuit 260 (in this embodiment, every 2.666 [μs]), the value of the fourth loop counter is within a predetermined range (this In the embodiment, “1” is updated in the range of 0 to 10006.
The hard random number update process updates the normal symbol lottery random number, the first special symbol lottery big hit random number, the second special symbol lottery big hit random number, and the reach group random number. The hard random number update process is executed as a function of the hard random number generation circuit 270 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 described later based on software.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the transmission shift register of the command output ports 1 and 2 transmits the control command stored in the FIFO buffer to the effect control circuit 300 or the payout control circuit 400. Starts the control command transmission process. The control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 described later based on software.

Each of the output ports 0, 1, 4 includes a plurality of output terminals and a port register. The port register includes a bit corresponding to each output terminal (an area in which control data designating output or stop is set). Each output port 0, 1, 4 controls the output of a control signal from the output terminal corresponding to the bit according to the value of each bit included in the port register.
At this time, for each bit included in the port register, when each bit included in the port register is “0”, the output port 0, 1, 4 outputs a control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit. When the bit level is “1”, the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit is set to high level (output).
Specifically, the output port 0 is provided with an output terminal corresponding to each data signal for controlling lighting of the main display 60. That is, the output port 0 includes an output terminal corresponding to “SEGDATA0”, an output terminal corresponding to “SEGDATA1”, an output terminal corresponding to “SEGDATA2”, an output terminal corresponding to “SEGDATA3”, and “SEGDATA4”. , An output terminal corresponding to “SEGDATA5”, an output terminal corresponding to “SEGDATA6”, and an output terminal corresponding to “SEGDATA7”.
In addition, the port register of the output port 0 includes a bit corresponding to “SEGDATA0”, a bit corresponding to “SEGDATA1”, a bit corresponding to “SEGDATA2”, a bit corresponding to “SEGDATA3”, and “SEGDATA4”. A corresponding bit, a bit corresponding to “SEGDATA5”, a bit corresponding to “SEGDATA6”, and a bit corresponding to “SEGDATA7” are included.
Accordingly, for example, when “0” is set as the value of the bit corresponding to “SEGDATA0” of the port register, the data signal (“SEGDATA0”) output from the output terminal corresponding to “SEGDATA0” is set. Become low level. On the other hand, when “1” is set as the value of the bit corresponding to “SEGDATA0” of the port register, the data signal (“SEGDATA0”) output from the output terminal corresponding to “SEGDATA0” is set to the high level. Become.

The output port 1 is provided with an output terminal corresponding to each common signal for controlling lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 61. That is, the output port 1 includes an output terminal corresponding to “COM0”, an output terminal corresponding to “COM1”, an output terminal corresponding to “COM2”, and an output terminal corresponding to “COM3”. It has been.
The port register of the output port 1 includes a bit corresponding to “COM0”, a bit corresponding to “COM1”, a bit corresponding to “COM2”, and a bit corresponding to “COM3”. .
Thereby, for example, when “0” is set as the value of the bit corresponding to “COM1” of the port register, the data signal (“COM1”) output from the output terminal corresponding to “COM1” is set. Become low level. On the other hand, when “1” is set as the value of the bit corresponding to “COM1” of the port register, the data signal (“COM1”) output from the output terminal corresponding to “COM1” is high level. Become.

The output port 4 is provided with an output terminal corresponding to each data signal for controlling lighting of the performance display device 61. That is, the output port 4 includes an output terminal corresponding to “7SEGDATA0”, an output terminal corresponding to “7SEGDATA1”, an output terminal corresponding to “7SEGDATA2”, an output terminal corresponding to “7SEGDATA3”, and “7SEGDATA4”. , An output terminal corresponding to “7SEGDATA5”, an output terminal corresponding to “7SEGDATA6”, and an output terminal corresponding to “7SEGDATA7”.
In addition, the port register of the output port 4 includes a bit corresponding to “7SEGDATA0”, a bit corresponding to “7SEGDATA1”, a bit corresponding to “7SEGDATA2”, a bit corresponding to “7SEGDATA3”, and “7SEGDATA4”. A corresponding bit, a bit corresponding to “7SEGDATA5”, a bit corresponding to “7SEGDATA6”, and a bit corresponding to “7SEGDATA7” are included.
Thereby, for example, when “0” is set as the value of the bit corresponding to “7SEGDATA4” of the port register, the data signal (“7SEGDATA4”) output from the output terminal corresponding to “7SEGDATA4” is set. Become low level. On the other hand, when “1” is set as the value of the bit corresponding to “7SEGDATA4” of the port register, the data signal (“SEGDATA0”) output from the output terminal corresponding to “7SEGDATA4” is high level. Become.

Next, a game control process executed by the CPU 210 of the main control circuit 200 based on a program (software) stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the CPU initialization process.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in FIG. The CPU initialization process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the CPU initialization process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the CPU initialization process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, an initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, a startup program is read from the ROM 220 and settings necessary for executing various processes are performed.
In step S1-2, a wait processing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time is set in the timer counter. Then, measurement of the set wait processing time by the timer counter is started. Also, the RAM clear signal is read.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a ram clear switch (not shown). When the power is turned on while the ram clear switch is being pressed, a ram clear signal is input to the input port 240 (input port 1).
In the RAM clear signal reading process, a value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the ram clear signal of the input port 240 is read.

In step S1-3, it is determined whether or not the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has elapsed. If it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-4. If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the process of step S1-3 is repeated.
In step S1-4, a RAM access permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission processing, processing necessary for permitting access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to access permission is stored as a RAM protect value in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is permitted.
In step S1-5, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the backup effective flag area of the RAM 230. If it is determined that “1” is set in the backup effective flag area (Yes), If the process proceeds to step S1-6 and it is determined that “0” is set in the backup valid flag area (No), the process proceeds to step S1-17.

In step S1-6, a used area checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-7. In the used area checksum calculation process, the checksum is calculated based on information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
In step S1-7, a non-use area checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-8. In the non-use area checksum calculation process, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-use area M2 (F210H to F228H) of the RAM 230 in the backup information.
In step S1-8, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in steps S1-6 and S1-7 is normal. If it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), step S1-9 is performed. If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-17.
Here, “the checksum value of the use area M1 calculated in step S1-6 matches the checksum value of the use area M1 stored in the checksum buffer area” and “step S1- When the checksum value of the non-use area M2 calculated in step 7 matches the checksum value of the non-use area M2 stored in the checksum buffer area " It is determined that the checksum is normal.
On the other hand, “the checksum value of the use area M1 calculated in step S1-6 matches the checksum value of the use area M1 stored in the checksum buffer area” and “step S1-7. The checksum value of the non-use area M2 calculated in step 1 matches the checksum value of the non-use area M2 stored in the checksum buffer area ”. If not, it is determined that the checksum is not normal.

In step S1-9, based on the value read in step S1-2 (value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the ram clear signal), it is determined whether or not the ram clear signal is input. If it is determined that no input has been made (No), the process proceeds to step S1-10. If it is determined that a ram clear signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
In step S1-10, a backup valid flag release process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-11. In the backup valid flag release process, “0” is set in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S1-11, initialization processing at the time of power recovery is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-12. In the power recovery initialization process, the RAM 230 initializes data to be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored (when the data before the power is shut off) is maintained.
In step S1-12, a power recovery subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-13. In the power-return subcommand transmission process, a subcommand (control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300) designating that the power supply has been restored is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do. Further, a subcommand for designating a value set in the setting information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-13, a power supply return payout command transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the power return payout command transmission process, a payout command (control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the payout control circuit 400) designating that the power supply has been recovered from the power shutdown is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do.

In step S1-14, an effect return subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the effect return subcommand transmission process, the effect return subcommand (power recovery return phase designation command, gaming state designation command, power supply restoration designation command, etc.) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Here, the “power supply restoration phase designation command” is a control command for designating a special game phase in which the performance is restored.
In the effect return subcommand transmission process, first, the current special game phase is confirmed based on the value of the special game phase flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. Then, a power return phase designation command for designating the confirmed special game phase is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Also, a gaming state offset value is calculated based on the current gaming state. Specifically, the value of the time reduction control flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230, the value of the special figure high probability state flag, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag, and the value of the rotation number counter after the big hit are confirmed. Then, a gaming state offset value corresponding to the confirmation result is calculated. Then, a gaming state designation command that designates the calculated gaming state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-15, an interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16. In the interrupt initial setting process, the CTC (counter / timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is initialized.
Specifically, the CPU 210 sets an interrupt vector register, and sets an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in the present embodiment) in the CTC.

In step S1-16, a set value change permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to a main loop process (step S2-1).
In the set value change permission process, first, it is determined whether or not a set value change permission condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the set value change permission condition is satisfied, “1” is set in the set value change permission flag area of the RAM 230. On the other hand, when it is determined that the set value change permission condition is not satisfied, “0” is set in the set value change permission flag area of the RAM 230.
In the present embodiment, both “the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111” and “the inner frame unit 3 is opened (or the integrated door unit 4 is opened)”. If the above condition is satisfied, it is determined that the set value change condition is satisfied.
On the other hand, at least one of “the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111” and “the inner frame unit 3 is opened (or the integrated door unit 4 is opened)”. If the above condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the set value change condition is not satisfied.
In addition, when both the conditions that “the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111” and “the door opening information (external signal) is being output” are satisfied, the setting value change condition is satisfied. Determined and set when at least one of the conditions that "the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111" and "the door opening information (external signal) is being output" is not satisfied It may be configured to determine that the value change condition is not satisfied.

In step S1-17, a non-use area initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-18. In the unused area initialization process, the unused area M2 in the RAM 230 is initialized.
Specifically, in the unused area initialization process, information stored in the unused area M2 is cleared (initialized). As a result, the work area and the stack area of the non-use area M2 are all initialized, and the contents are erased even if valid backup information is stored.
In step S1-18, a use area initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-19. In the use area initialization process, the use area M1 in the RAM 230 is initialized.
Specifically, in the use area initialization process, information stored in the use area M1 is cleared (initialized). As a result, the work area and the stack area of the use area M1 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
That is, predetermined initial values are set as values of various flag areas (time-short control flag area, special figure high probability state flag area, previous big hit symbol flag area, special game phase flag area, normal game phase flag area, etc.) . Also, predetermined initial values (“0” in the present embodiment) are set as the values of various counter areas (time-short counter area, big hit post-rotation counter area, etc.). Further, a predetermined initial value (“3” in the present embodiment) is set in the setting information storage area.
In this embodiment, when the checksum is not normal, the use area M1 is initialized after the non-use area M2 is initialized. On the other hand, when the checksum is normal, the use area M1 is initialized only when the RAM clear signal is input.
As a result, as long as the checksum is normal, even if the RAM clear signal is input, the non-use area M2 is not initialized. Therefore, even if the RAM clear switch is operated, information on the base ratio (not used) Information stored in the area M2) can be maintained.

In step S1-19, a RAM clear subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-20. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, a subcommand designating that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM230. Further, the subcommand specifying the value (setting value = “3”) set in the setting information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-20, a RAM clear payout command transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the RAM clear payout command transmission process, a payout command designating that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, main loop processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the main loop process.
When the CPU initialization process (step S1-16) shown in FIG. 6 ends, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in FIG. The main loop process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop process is a process based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the main loop process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, an interrupt prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state for prohibiting interrupts of other processes is set. As a result, during a period in which the interrupt disabled state is set, execution of power-off saving processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
Here, the “initial value random number” is a random number for determining an initial value and an end value of a soft random number (a random symbol random number, a reach mode random number, a variation pattern random number, etc.) that is a random number generated in the program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number is updated within a range from a preset initial value to an end value. The initial value and end value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number are changed every time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

In step S2-3, main command analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, a main command received from the payout control circuit 400 (a control command transmitted from the payout control circuit 400 to the main control circuit 200) is analyzed, and a process corresponding to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, a subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of the output port 250 (command output port 1).
As a result, the subcommand input to the transmission data register is stored (stored) in the FIFO buffer. Then, the subcommands stored in the FIFO buffer are transmitted to the effect control circuit 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
In step S2-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt enable process, the interrupt disabled state is canceled. As a result, during the period from the execution of the interrupt permission process of step S2-5 to the execution of the interrupt prohibition process of step S2-1, execution of the power-off saving process, timer interrupt process, etc. is permitted. Interrupt enabled period.
In step S2-6, other random number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update process, soft random numbers excluding the winning design random numbers (reach mode random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

Next, the power-off saving process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the power-off saving process.
The power supply circuit 600 is connected to a power cutoff detection circuit (not shown). The power shutdown detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied by the power supply circuit 600, and outputs a power shutdown notice signal to the main control circuit 200 when the value of the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value. .
When the CPU 210 receives the power shutdown notice signal, the CPU 210 starts the power saving shutdown process shown in FIG. 8 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process. The power saving shutdown process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the power-off saving process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the power saving shutdown process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, a register saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register saving process, the register value used during the execution of the main loop process is saved in the saving area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-2, a power-off notice signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power shutdown notice signal reading process, the power shutdown notice signal is read from the power shutdown detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power shutdown notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power shutdown notice signal of the input port 240 is read.
In step S3-3, based on the value read in step S3-2 (value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power shutdown notice signal), is the power shutdown notice signal input from the power shutdown detection circuit? If it is determined (bit check) and it is determined that the power shutdown notice signal is input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4, and it is determined that the power shutdown notice signal is not input. In (No), it transfers to step S3-14.

In step S3-4, an output port stop process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop process, output of control signals and control commands by the output port 250 (output port 0 to output port 4) is stopped. Further, the detection signal input to the input port 240 (input port 0 to input port 3) is stopped.
In particular, in the output port stop process, the values of all bits included in the port registers of the output ports 0, 1, and 4 are initialized.
Specifically, in the output port stop process, output of each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the main display 60 is stopped. That is, “0” is set as the value of each bit for all bits (bits corresponding to “SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) included in the port register of the output port 0. As a result, the output of each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) is stopped (becomes a low level).
Further, in the output port stop process, the output of each common signal (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling the lighting of the main display 60 and the performance display device 61 is stopped. That is, “0” is set as the value of each bit for all bits (bits corresponding to “COM0” to “COM3”) included in the port register of the output port 1. As a result, the output of each common signal (“COM0” to “COM3”) is stopped (becomes a low level).
Further, in the output port stop process, the output of each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 61 is stopped. That is, “0” is set as the value of each bit for all bits (bits corresponding to “7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) included in the port register of the output port 4. As a result, the output of each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) is stopped (becomes a low level).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lighting for the main display 60 is controlled by the processing based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220. Control data (drive data) and control data (drive data) for controlling lighting of the performance display device 61 are initialized.
Here, the control data for controlling the lighting of the main display 60 is the control data (specifically, the port of the output port 0) for controlling the output of each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”). Value of each bit included in the register) and control data for controlling the output of each common signal ("COM0" to "COM3") (specifically, each bit included in the port register of the output port 1) Value).
The control data for controlling lighting of the performance display device 61 is control data for controlling the output of each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) (specifically, the port register of the output port 4). And the control data (specifically, each bit included in the port register of the output port 1) for controlling the output of each common signal ("COM0" to "COM3") Value).
As a result, the control data for controlling the lighting of the main display 60 is a process based on a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 (described later). The processing based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) set by the main display data signal output processing in step S30-5 and stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 (step S3) -4 output port stop processing or main display data signal clear processing in step S30-1 described later).
On the other hand, the control data for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 61 is based on a program (a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61) stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. A process based on a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) set in the process (performance display device data signal output process in step S37-4 described later) and stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220 It is initialized by (output port stop processing in step S3-4 or performance display device data signal clear processing in step S30-2 described later).
Here, in the output port stop process, the main display data signal control data set in the main display data signal control data setting area described later is cleared (initialized), and the performance display data signal control data described later is displayed. The performance display device data signal control data set in the setting area may be cleared (initialized).

In step S3-5, a used area checksum storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the used area checksum storage process, a checksum is calculated based on information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum buffer area.
In step S3-6, a non-use area checksum storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the non-use area checksum saving process, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-use area M2 (F210H to F228H) of the RAM 230. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum buffer area.
In step S3-7, a backup valid flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the backup valid flag setting process, “1” is set in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-8, a RAM access prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the RAM access prohibition process, a process for prohibiting access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to access prohibition is stored as a RAM protect value in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the work area (including the use-prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

In step S3-9, a loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of times of power-off notice signal reading is set as the value of the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-10, a power-off notice signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-11. In the power shutdown notice signal reading process, the power shutdown notice signal is read from the power shutdown detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power shutdown notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power shutdown notice signal of the input port 240 is read.
In step S3-11, based on the value read in step S3-10 (value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power shutdown notice signal), is the power shutdown notice signal input from the power shutdown detection circuit? If it is determined that the power-off notice signal is not input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-12, and if it is determined that the power-off notice signal is input (Yes). Shifts to Step S3-9.
In step S3-12, a loop counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-13. In the loop counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the return determination loop counter is newly set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-13, it is determined whether or not the value of the return determination loop counter is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is “0” (Yes), the CPU When the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S1-1) and it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S3-10.
In step S3-14, a register return process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process returns to the original process. In the register restoration process, the register value saved in step S3-1 is restored. Then, after the register restoration process is completed, the process returns to the main loop process (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.
The frequency generation circuit 260 generates an interrupt request signal every predetermined interrupt cycle (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment).
In response to the generation of the interrupt request signal, the CPU 210 starts the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 during the interrupt permission period of the main loop process. The main loop process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop process is a process based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, a register saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register saving process, all register values used during the execution of the main loop process are saved in the saving area of the RAM 230.
In step S4-2, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt permission process, an interrupt is permitted.
In step S4-3, a set value management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4. The set value management process will be described later.
In step S4-4, dynamic port output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. The dynamic port output process will be described later.

In step S4-5, port input processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the port input process, the latest switch state is accurately acquired.
Specifically, in the port input process, it is determined whether or not an ON state has occurred for each detection signal input to the input port 240 (input port 0 to input port 3). At this time, based on the information set in the reception storage area corresponding to each detection signal (each detection switch / detection sensor), it is determined whether or not the detection signal is on. When it is determined that an ON state has occurred for each detection signal, information indicating that the ON state has occurred (detected) for the detection signal is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230.
Here, the “on state” refers to a state in which the detection signal is not input (low level) to a state where the detection signal is input (high level).

In step S4-6, timer update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-7. In the timer update process, various timers are updated. Specifically, in the timer update process, the values of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, external information timer, etc.) are updated.
In step S4-7, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-8. The initial value random number update process in step S4-7 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2. Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-8, a winning symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-9. In the winning symbol random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the winning symbol random number among the soft random numbers is updated.
In step S4-9, switch management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the switch management process, a process (acquisition of various random numbers, etc.) corresponding to the state of each switch 101, 102, 104 (whether or not an on state is detected) is executed. The switch management process will be described later.

In step S4-10, an addition number calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. In the addition number calculation process, a value to be added to an out-ball number counter described later and a value to be added to a payout number counter described later are calculated and set.
That is, in the addition number calculation process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined gaming state. And when it determines with it not being a predetermined | prescribed gaming state, the non-predetermined gaming state addition number calculation process mentioned later is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game state is the predetermined game state, an addition number calculation process for a predetermined game state described later is executed.
In the present embodiment, when the “special figure low probability state” is occurring and the time-shortening control is stopped, it is determined that the game state is the predetermined game state. On the other hand, if at least one of the “special figure high probability state” is being generated and the short-time control is being executed, it is determined that the game state is not the predetermined game state.

In the non-predetermined gaming state addition number calculation process, first, the value stored in the out-ball number addition value storage area is cleared, and the value stored in the payout number addition value storage area is cleared.
Next, “0” is set as a value to be added to the out ball number counter in the out ball number addition value storage area of the RAM 230.
Next, “0” is set as a value to be added to the payout number counter in the payout number addition value storage area of the RAM 230.

On the other hand, in the predetermined gaming state addition number calculation process, first, the value stored in the out-ball number addition value storage area is cleared, and the value stored in the payout number addition value storage area is cleared. Also, “0” is set as the value of the payout number calculation counter.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the out switch 109 has been detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 has been detected, “1” is set as a value to be added to the out ball number counter in the out ball number addition value storage area of the RAM 230. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, “0” is set as a value to be added to the out ball number counter in the out ball number addition value storage area of the RAM 230.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the right winning opening switch winning ball 105 is detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the right winning opening switch winning ball 105 has been detected, the winning ball paid out in accordance with the game ball entering the right other winning port 54 is set to the value of the payout number calculation counter. The number “10” is added. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the right winning opening switch winning ball 105 is not detected, addition to the value of the payout number calculation counter is not executed.
Next, it is determined whether or not the on state of the left winning port switch winning ball 106 is detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the left winning port switch winning ball 106 has been detected, the value of the payout number calculation counter is paid out according to the game ball entering the left other winning ports 55-57. Add “10” which is the number of prize balls. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the left winning opening switch winning ball 106 is not detected, the addition to the value of the payout number calculation counter is not executed.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has been detected, a prize ball that is paid out in accordance with the number of game balls that enter the first start port 51 is set to the value of the payout number calculation counter. The number “3” is added. When it is determined that the on-state of the special opening 1 is not detected, addition to the value of the payout number calculation counter is not executed.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 has been detected, a prize ball is paid out in accordance with the game ball entering the second start port 52 to the value of the payout number calculation counter. The number “1” is added. When it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is not detected, the addition to the value of the payout number calculation counter is not executed.
Next, in the payout amount addition value storage area of the RAM 230, the value of the payout number calculation counter is set as a value to be added to the payout number counter.

In step S4-11, a special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the special game management process, the operation of the special figure display device and the operation of the special electric accessory 53a are managed. The special game management process will be described later.
In step S4-12, a normal game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the normal game management process, the operation of the general-purpose display device and the operation of the normal electric accessory 52a are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.

In step S4-13, error management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the error management process, various errors (abnormal conditions) are determined, and settings are made according to the determination results.
In step S4-14, a winning opening switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. In the winning opening switch processing, processing (update of various counters, etc.) corresponding to the state of each switch 101 to 103, 105, 106 (whether or not an on state is detected) is executed.
In step S4-15, a payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-14, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
In the present embodiment, as the prize ball control counter, the prize ball control counter 1 that stores the number of ball game balls that have entered the big prize opening 53 and the number of ball game balls that have entered the right other prize opening 54 are stored. The prize ball control counter 2, the prize ball control counter 3 in which the number of ball game balls entered in the upper left / left middle / lower left winning holes 55 to 57 are stored, and the ball game ball entered in the first start opening 51 And the prize ball control counter 4 in which the number of ball game balls that have entered the second start port 52 are stored.

In the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating a predetermined number (15 [balls] in this embodiment) of payout balls is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. After that, when the payout of the prize ball by the game ball payout device 440 is completed, the payout control circuit 400 transmits a main command designating the completion of the payout to the main control circuit 200. Then, “1” is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1 in response to reception of the main command designating completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]) of payout balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. Thereafter, “1” is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to reception of the main command designating completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]) of payout balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. Thereafter, “1” is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to reception of the main command designating completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating a predetermined number (3 balls in this embodiment) of prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. Thereafter, “1” is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to reception of the main command designating completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is “1” or more, a payout command for designating a predetermined number (1 [ball] in the present embodiment) of the prize balls is generated, The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. Thereafter, “1” is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5 in response to reception of the main command designating completion of the payout.

In step S4-16, a launch position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the launch position designation management process, a process related to launch position designation is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when changing from a state in which the launch of the game ball to the left route is designated to a state in which the launch of the game ball to the right route is designated (at the start of the big hit gaming state, etc.) In addition, a subcommand designating launching of the game ball to the right path is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a subcommand for designating the launch of the game ball on the right path is transmitted to the effect control circuit 300.

In step S4-17, external information management processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the external information management process, external information (external signal) output to the hall computer 450 (or data display device) is set.
In the present embodiment, as the external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to the external device (the electronic device such as the hall computer 450 and the data display device), the symbol determination number information (OUT1), the start port information (OUT2), the jackpot Information (OUT3 to OUT6), security information, out-payout number information (OUT8), setting value changing information, and the like are defined.
The “symbol determined number information” is external information regarding the number of executions of the special symbol lottery (special symbol variation display and stop display). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the symbol determination number information to the hall computer 450 (or the data display device) every time the number of executions of the special symbol stop display reaches a predetermined number.
“Starting port information” is external information relating to the entrance of game balls into the starting ports 51 and 52. The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the start port information to the hall computer 450 (or the data display device) every time an on state of the detection signals input from the start port switches 101 and 102 is detected. .
The “hit information” is external information regarding the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. The main control circuit 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to the jackpot information to the hall computer 450 (or data display device) every time a jackpot gaming state is generated.
The “out port payout information” is external information regarding the number of game balls discharged from the discharge path (or the number of game balls discharged from the out port 58). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the out-payout number information to the hall computer 450 every time the value of the external information out-ball number counter reaches a predetermined value.
“Setting value changing information” is external information indicating that the setting value is being changed (that the setting value change permission condition is satisfied). The CPU 210 always outputs an external signal corresponding to the setting value changing information to the hall computer 450 during the period in which “1” is set in the setting value changing flag area.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information confirmation number counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information determination number counter has reached a predetermined value, the symbol determination number information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thereafter, a predetermined value (1 [times] in the present embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information determination number counter. As a result, symbol determination frequency information (external signal) is output to the hall computer 450.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information start entrance ball number counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in the present embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the external information start opening ball count counter has reached a predetermined value, the start opening information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thereafter, a predetermined value (1 [times] in the present embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information start entrance ball number counter. Thereby, start port information (external signal) is output to the hall computer 450.
In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information jackpot counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in the present embodiment). If it is determined that the value of the external information jackpot counter has reached a predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thereafter, a predetermined value (1 [times] in the present embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information jackpot counter. As a result, jackpot information (external signal) is output to the hall computer 450.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information out ball counter reaches a predetermined value (10 [sphere] in the present embodiment). When it is determined that the value of the external information out ball counter has reached a predetermined value, the outlet payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Thereafter, a predetermined value (10 [spheres] in the present embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the external information out ball counter. As a result, out-port payout information (external signal) is output to the hall computer 450.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting value changing flag area. If it is determined that “1” is set in the setting value changing flag area, the setting value changing information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the setting value changing information (external signal) is output to the hall computer 450.

In step S4-18, a test signal management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the test signal management process, test information (test signal) is set.
The test signal management process is a process based on a program for executing a process related to a test defined by the gaming machine rules. That is, the test signal management process is a process based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The test signal tube is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
Specifically, in the test signal management process, test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (big hit gaming state, execution state of short-time control, probability state of special symbol lottery, etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. To remember.
In step S4-19, a performance display device control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. The performance display device control process will be described later.
In step S4-20, an LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, control data (drive data) for controlling lighting of a predetermined display device is set in the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-21, a solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, control data (drive data) output to the solenoids 64 and 65 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S4-22, port output processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-23. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer 450, the solenoids 64 and 65, and the like.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signals, control signals, etc.) set in the port output request buffer is output to the output port 250 (output port 2, output port 3). As a result, the external signal set in the port output request buffer is output to the hall computer 450. Further, the solenoids 64 and 65 are driven and controlled based on the drive signal set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, a register restoration process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored. In the register restoration process, the register value saved in step S4-1 is restored. Then, after the register restoration process is completed, the process returns to the main loop process (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

Next, the setting value management process in step S4-3 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the set value management process.
When the set value management process is executed in step S4-3, as shown in FIG. 10, first, the process proceeds to step S29-1.
In step S29-1, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the setting value change permission flag area, and when it is determined that “1” is set in the setting value change permission flag area (Yes). Shifts to step S29-2, and when it is determined that “0” is set in the set value change permission flag area (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S4-4) is performed. ).
In step S29-2, it is determined whether or not the set value change permission condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the set value change permission condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S29-3 and the set value is changed. If it is determined that the change permission condition is not satisfied (No), the process proceeds to step S29-6.
As described above, both “the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111” and “the inner frame unit 3 is opened (or the integrated door unit 4 is opened)”. If the above condition is satisfied, it is determined that the set value change condition is satisfied.
On the other hand, at least one of “the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111” and “the inner frame unit 3 is opened (or the integrated door unit 4 is opened)”. If this condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the set value change condition is not satisfied.
Note that when both the conditions that “the detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111” and “the door opening information (external signal) is being output” are satisfied, the setting value change condition is satisfied. If “a detection signal is input from the key rotation detection switch 111” and “the door opening information (external signal) is being output” is not satisfied, The configuration may be such that it is determined that the set value change condition is not satisfied.

In step S29-3, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the set value selection switch 112. If it is determined that a detection signal is input from the set value selection switch 112 (Yes), step S29 is performed. If it is determined that the detection signal is not input from the set value selection switch 112 (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4).
In step S29-4, a setting value changing process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-5. In the setting value changing process, the value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area is changed. Here, in this embodiment, every time a detection signal is input from the set value selection switch 112, a predetermined order (for example, set value = “1”, set value = “2”, set value = “3”, set value). Value = “4”, setting value = “5”, setting value = “6”, setting value = “1”, setting value = “2”.
In step S29-5, a set value display update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the set value display update process, the display of the set value on the set value display device 62 is updated.
Specifically, in the set value display update process, first, a subcommand for specifying a value (set value after change) set in the setting information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In the set value display update process, next, the same value as the value (set value after change) set in the setting information storage area is set in the set value display counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the set value display device 62, the segment corresponding to the value of the set value display counter is controlled to be lit.
In the present embodiment, the display of the set value on the set value display device 62 is executed only during the period in which the set value change permission condition is satisfied.

In step S29-6, set value change end processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step S4-4).
In the set value change end process, “0” is set in the set value change permission flag area. Also, the value of the set value display counter is initialized (cleared). As a result, all the segments constituting the set value display device 62 are extinguished (display of the set value on the set value display device 62 ends).

Next, the dynamic port output process in step S4-4 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the dynamic port output process.
The dynamic port output process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the dynamic port output process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-4, as shown in FIG. 11, first, the process proceeds to step S30-1.
In step S30-1, a main display data signal clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-2. In the main display data signal clear process, the values of all the bits included in the port register of the output port 0 are initialized.
Specifically, in the main display data signal clear process, “0” is set as the value of each bit for all bits (bits corresponding to “SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) included in the port register of the output port 0. Set.
As a result, the output of each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) is stopped (becomes a low level).
Here, in the main display data signal clear process, the main display data signal control data set in the main display data signal control data setting area may be cleared (initialized).

In step S30-2, a performance display device data signal clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the performance display device data signal clear process, the values of all the bits included in the port register of the output port 4 are initialized.
Specifically, in the performance display device data signal clear processing, “0” is set as the value of each bit for all bits (bits corresponding to “7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) included in the port register of the output port 4. Set.
As a result, the output of each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) is stopped (becomes a low level).
Here, in the performance display device data signal clear process, the performance display device data signal control data set in the performance display device data signal control data setting area may be cleared (initialized).

In step S30-3, a common signal update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-4. In the common signal update process, the common signal control data set in the common signal control data setting area is updated.
Specifically, the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230 includes a common signal control data setting area in which common signal control data is set (stored).
The common signal control data is information for controlling output / stop of each common signal (each of “COM0” to “COM3”).
In the present embodiment, “common signal control data 1” to “common signal control data 4” are defined as common signal control data.
“Common signal control data 1” is data that designates the output of “COM0” among “COM0” to “COM3” and designates the stop of the outputs of “COM1”, “COM2”, and “COM3”. Yes.
“Common signal control data 2” is data that designates the output of “COM1” among “COM0” to “COM3” and designates the stop of the outputs of “COM0”, “COM2”, and “COM3”. Yes.
“Common signal control data 3” is data that designates the output of “COM2” among “COM0” to “COM3” and designates the stop of the outputs of “COM0”, “COM1”, and “COM3”. Yes.
“Common signal control data 4” is data that designates the output of “COM3” among “COM0” to “COM3” and designates the stop of the outputs of “COM0”, “COM1”, and “COM2”. Yes.
In the common signal update process, one common signal control data among the “common signal control data 1” to “common signal control data 4” is set in the common signal control data setting area. At this time, every time the common signal update process is executed, a predetermined order (for example, “common signal control data 1”, “common signal control data 2”, “common signal control data 3”, “common signal control data 4”). ”,“ Common signal control data 1 ”,“ common signal control data 2 ”,...), The common signal control data set in the common signal control data setting area is changed.
As a result, each time the common signal update process is executed, output is performed in a predetermined order (for example, “COM0”, “COM1”, “COM2”, “COM3”, “COM0”, “COM1”...). The common signal to be switched (common signal to be high level) is switched.

In step S30-4, a common signal output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-5. In the common signal output processing, the output of each common signal (each of “COM0” to “COM3”) from the output port 1 is controlled according to the common signal control data set in the common signal control data setting area.
Specifically, in the common signal output processing, each bit (“COM0” to “COM3”) included in the port register of the output port 1 according to the common signal control data set in the common signal control data setting area. Set the value of the bit corresponding to.
Thereby, for each bit included in the port register of the output port 1, when the value of the bit is “1”, the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit is controlled to the high level, When the value of the bit = “0”, the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit is controlled to the low level.

In step S30-5, main display data signal output processing is executed, and the flow proceeds to step S30-6. In the main display data signal output process, each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) by the output port 0 is set in accordance with the main display data signal control data set in the main display data signal control data setting area. Control the output.
Specifically, the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230 includes a main display data signal control data setting area in which main display data signal control data is set (stored).
Here, the main display data signal control data includes seg data corresponding to the special figure 1 display device, seg data corresponding to the special figure 2 display device, seg data corresponding to the common figure display device, and the like.
In the main display data signal output processing, each bit (“SEGDATA0”) included in the port register of the output port 0 is determined according to the main display data signal control data set in the main display data signal control data setting area. To (SEGDATA7) are set.
In the present embodiment, control data set in the port register of output port 0 based on the main display data signal control data set in the main display data signal control data setting area (included in the port register of output port 0) Control data that specifies the value to be set for each bit). The selected / acquired control data is set in the port register of the output port 0.
Thereby, for each bit included in the port register of the output port 0, when the value of the bit is “1”, the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit is controlled to a high level, When the value of the bit = “0”, the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit is controlled to the low level.

In step S30-6, an interrupt prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-7. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt prohibition state for prohibiting interrupts of other processes is set. As a result, during a period in which the interrupt disabled state is set, execution of power-off saving processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S30-7, a register saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-8. In the register saving process, the value of the flag register is saved in the RAM saving area.
In step S30-8, a performance display device output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-9. The performance display device output process will be described later.
In step S30-9, a register restoration process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-10. In the register restoration process, the value of the flag register saved in step S30-7 is restored.
In step S30-10, an interrupt permission process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-5). In the interrupt enable process, the interrupt disabled state is canceled. As a result, execution of a power-off saving process, a timer interrupt process, and the like is permitted.

Next, the performance display device output in step S30-8 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the performance display device output process.
The performance display device output process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61. In other words, the performance display device output process is based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device output process is called during the execution of the dynamic port output process.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S30-8, the process first proceeds to step S37-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S37-1, stack pointer save processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-2. In the stack pointer saving process, the value of the stack pointer used in the processing based on the program stored in the use area m1 is saved in the RAM saving area.
In step S37-2, an out-of-area stack pointer setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-2. In the out-of-area stack pointer setting process, a stack pointer used for the process based on the program stored in the out-of-use area m2 is set.
In step S37-3, a register saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-4. In the register saving process, the register value used in the processing based on the program stored in the use area m1 is saved in the RAM saving area.

In step S37-4, a performance display device data signal output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-5. In the performance display device data signal output processing, each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) by the output port 4 is set according to the performance display device data signal control data set in the performance display device data signal control data setting area. Control the output.
More specifically, the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230 includes a performance display device data signal control data setting area in which performance display device data signal control data is set (stored).
Here, the performance display device data signal control data includes segment data corresponding to the performance display device.
Then, in the performance display device data signal output processing, each bit (“7SEGDATA0”) included in the port register of the output port 4 according to the performance display device data signal control data set in the performance display device data signal control data setting area. To (7SEGDATA7) are set.
In the present embodiment, control data set in the port register of the output port 4 (included in the port register of the output port 4) based on the performance display device data signal control data set in the performance display device data signal control data setting area. Control data that specifies the value to be set for each bit). The selected / acquired control data is set in the port register of the output port 4.
Thereby, for each bit included in the port register of the output port 4, when the value of the bit = “1”, the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit is controlled to a high level, When the value of the bit = “0”, the control signal output from the output terminal corresponding to the bit is controlled to the low level.

In step S37-5, a register restoration process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-6. In the register restoration process, the register value saved in step S37-3 (the register value used in the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) is restored.
In step S37-6, stack pointer return processing is executed, a series of processing is terminated, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (step S30-9). In the stack pointer restoration process, the value of the stack pointer saved in step S37-1 (the value of the stack pointer used in the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) is restored.

Next, the switch management process in step S4-9 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the switch management process.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-9, as shown in FIG. 13, first, the process proceeds to step S5-1.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the gate switch 104 has been detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the gate switch 104 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-2. If it is determined that the ON state of the switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, a normal start ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. The normal start ball detection process will be described later.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has been detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has been detected (Yes), If the process proceeds to S5-4 and it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is not detected (No), the process proceeds to Step S5-5.
In step S5-4, special figure 1 starting ball detection processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. The special figure 1 starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 has been detected (Yes), If the process proceeds to S5-6 and it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 has not been detected (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). To do.
In step S5-6, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). The special figure 2 starting ball detection process will be described later.

Next, the normal starting ball detection process in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a general-purpose starting ball detection process.
When the normal start ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, as shown in FIG. 14, the process first proceeds to step S6-1.
In step S6-1, a normal random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the normal random number acquisition process, a random number (random value) is acquired (loaded) from a loop counter corresponding to the normal symbol lottery.
In step S6-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the general-purpose hold number counter is an upper limit value (in this embodiment, “1”), and it is determined that the value of the general-purpose hold number counter is not the upper limit value. In (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3, and when it is determined that the value of the general-purpose hold number counter is the upper limit value (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S5- Move to 3).
In step S6-3, a general-purpose pending number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the usual figure pending number counter update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the usual figure pending number counter is newly set in the usual figure pending number counter.
In step S6-4, a regular random number storage process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the usual random number saving process, the winning random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the usual figure starting information storage area of the RAM 230 as ordinary figure starting information.

Next, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process of step S5-4 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, as shown in FIG. 15, first, the process proceeds to step S7-1.
In step S7-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. Also, “1” is added to the value of the external information start-entrance ball count counter.
In step S7-2, a holding number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the holding number counter address setting process, the address of the special figure 1 holding number counter is set in the holding number counter address setting area of the RAM 230.
In step S7-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

Next, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process of step S5-6 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, as shown in FIG. 16, first, the process proceeds to step S8-1.
In step S8-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. Also, “1” is added to the value of the external information start-entrance ball count counter.
In step S8-2, a holding number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the holding number counter address setting process, the address of the special figure 2 holding number counter is set in the holding number counter address area of the RAM 230.
In step S8-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process in steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing special symbol random number acquisition processing.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, as shown in FIG. 17, first, the process proceeds to step S9-1.
In step S9-1, a special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, a special figure hold number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special figure hold number acquisition process, the value of the special figure hold number counter (special figure 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold number counter) specified by the address set in the hold number counter address area (special figure 1 hold number) Number or special figure 2 hold number) is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-3, a special figure random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special figure random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random number values) such as a big hit random number, a winning design random number, a reach group random number, a reach mode random number, and a variation pattern random number are acquired (loaded) from the loop counter corresponding to each lottery. At this time, the corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, it is determined whether or not the special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) acquired in step S9-2 is an upper limit value ("4" in the present embodiment). If it is determined that the special figure hold number is not the upper limit value (No), the process proceeds to step S9-5. If it is determined that the special figure hold number is the upper limit value (Yes), a series of processes is performed. And the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10 or S5-5).
In step S9-5, a special figure holding number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special figure hold number counter update process, the value set in the special figure hold number counter (special figure 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold number counter) specified by the address set in the hold number counter address area A value obtained by adding “1” to is newly set in the special figure holding number counter.

In step S9-6, a special figure random number storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special figure random number storing process, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as special figure start information (special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) as a special figure start information storage area (special figure 1 start). Information storage area or special figure 2 start information storage area).
Specifically, the RAM 230 stores a changing start information storage area in which start information during execution of special symbol notification display is stored, and a special figure 1 start information in which start determination is suspended. It includes a start information storage area and a special figure 2 start information storage area where start determination is suspended.
The special figure 1 start information storage area includes a first storage part to a fourth storage part as a storage part capable of storing the special figure 1 start information. Different priority orders are defined in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit. That is, the priority order of each storage unit is defined to be the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit (upper order → lower order) in descending order of priority. . The special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area is subjected to start determination in order from the special figure 1 start information stored in the higher priority storage unit.
The special figure 2 start information storage area includes a first storage part to a fourth storage part as a storage part capable of storing the special figure 2 start information. Different priority orders are defined in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit. That is, the priority order of each storage unit is defined to be the first storage unit, the second storage unit, the third storage unit, and the fourth storage unit (upper order → lower order) in descending order of priority. . And the special figure 2 starting information memorize | stored in the special figure 2 starting information storage area performs starting determination in an order from the special figure 2 starting information memorize | stored in the memory | storage part with a high priority.
If the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as the special diagram 1 start information. 1 Store in the start information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the highest priority storage unit among the free storage units. Specifically, when the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = “1”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the first storage unit. On the other hand, if the current value of the special figure 1 holding number counter = “2”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the second storage unit. If the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = “3”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the third storage unit. If the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = “4”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the fourth storage unit.
On the other hand, when the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as the special diagram 2 starting information. 2 Store in the start information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the highest priority storage unit among the free storage units. Specifically, when the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = “1”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the first storage unit. On the other hand, if the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = “2”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the second storage unit. If the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = “3”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the third storage unit. When the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = “4”, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the fourth storage unit.

  In step S9-7, the number-of-holds designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the hold number designation command setting process, a hold number designation command for designating that the special figure hold number (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) has increased by “1” is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do. At this time, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the number-of-holds designation command for designating that the number of special symbol 1 reservations has increased by "1" Is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230, and if the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, a hold number designation command for designating that the special figure 2 hold number has increased by "1" is stored in the RAM 230. Is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S9-8, a pre-determination process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10 or S5-5). In the pre-determination process, the start information (the special figure 1 start information or the special figure) saved (stored) in the special figure start information storage area (the special figure 1 start information storage area or the special figure 2 start information storage area) in step S9-6. (2 start information) (hereinafter referred to as “preliminary determination start information”), various lottery results are determined in advance.
In this embodiment, pre-determination of various lottery results is executed for all start information (Special Figure 1 start information and Special Figure 2 start information).
Note that the start information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state may be configured such that prior determination of various lottery results is not executed. In addition, for the special figure 2 start information acquired (stored) during stoppage of the time reduction control, the advance determination of various lottery results is not executed, and the special figure 1 start information acquired (stored) during execution of the time reduction control. As for, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed.

In the preliminary determination process, first, a preliminary special figure winning determination process is executed.
In the special special symbol winning determination process, a special symbol lottery result ("big hit" or "out of game") is determined (preliminary special symbol winning determination).
The ROM 220 stores a special symbol winning lottery table in which special bonus lottery values are registered. In addition, the special figure winning lottery table corresponds to each combination of a set value ("1" to "6") and a gaming state ("special figure low probability state" or "special figure high probability state"). The special figure winning lottery table is stored.
Specifically, as the special figure winning lottery table, “setting value 1 low-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, “setting value 1 high-accuracy special drawing winning lottery table”, and “setting value 2 low-probability special lottery table”. "Figure winning lottery table", "Set value 2 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table", "Set value 3 low accuracy special figure winning lottery table" and "Set value 3 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table" “Set value 4 low-accuracy special map winning lottery table”, “Set value 4 high-accuracy special map winning lottery table”, “Set value 5 low-accuracy special map winning lottery table”, “Setting value A “5 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, a “set value 6 low-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, and a “set value 6 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table” are stored.

In the “set value 1 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “1” and “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Selected). In the “set value 1 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “204” are registered as big hit values.
In the “set value 1 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “1” and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure high probability state”) Selected). In the “set value 1 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “2039” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 2 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “2” and “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Selected). In the “set value 2 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “209” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 2 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “2” and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of the “special figure high probability state”) Selected). In the “set value 2 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “2089” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 3 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “3” and “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Selected). In the “set value 3 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “214” of the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 3 high probability special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “3” and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure high probability state” Selected). In the “set value 3 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “2139” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 4 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “4” and “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Selected). In the “set value 4 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “219” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 4 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “4” and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure high probability state” Selected). In the “set value 4 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “2189” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “5” and “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Selected). In the “set value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “224” are registered as big hit values.
In the “set value 5 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “5” and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure high probability state” Selected). In the “set value 5 high-precision special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “2239” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.
In the “set value 6 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “6” and “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure low probability state” Selected). In the “set value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table”, among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535”, “0” to “229” are registered as big hit values.
In the “set value 6 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, the set value = “6” and “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of “special figure high probability state”) Selected). In the “set value 6 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table”, “0” to “2289” among the big hit random numbers “0” to “65535” are registered as the big hit values.

In the special special chart winning determination process, the value (setting value) set in the setting information storage area and the current gaming state ("high special probability state" or "low special probability state") are confirmed. The special figure winning lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the preliminary determination start information and the read special symbol winning lottery table, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is “big hit” (preliminary special symbol winning determination). .
Specifically, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the pre-determination start information matches the jackpot value registered in the read special symbol winning lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is set to “big hit” (Winning) is determined.
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the pre-judgment start information does not match the jackpot value registered in the read special figure winning lottery table (if it matches the outlier value), the special symbol The result of the lottery is determined to be “out” (decision).

In the pre-determination process, next, pre-special drawing stop symbol determination is executed. In the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination process, the special symbol stop symbol type is determined (pre-special symbol stop symbol determination).
In the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination process, if it is determined that “big hit” (winning) is determined by the pre-special symbol winning determination, the type of “big hit symbol” (winning type) is determined (pre-big hit symbol determination).
The ROM 220 stores a jackpot symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the hit symbol random number and the type of “hit symbol” is registered.
The big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to when the limiter function is not operated and the big hit symbol lottery table for limiter operation corresponding to the limiter function being activated are stored as the big hit symbol lottery table.
In addition, the limiter non-operating big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and the limiter non-operating big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are stored as the limiter non-operating big hit symbol lottery table. Has been.
Further, as the limiter operating big hit symbol lottery table, a limiter operating big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and a limiter operating big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are stored. .

In the limiter inactive big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, “big hit symbol” and “big hit symbol” are registered as the type of “big hit symbol”. As a result, when “0” is set in the limiter function operating flag area of the RAM 230 (when the limiter function is not operating), the “special bonus” is won by the first special symbol lottery executed. One of “one jackpot symbol” and “two jackpot symbols” is selected as the type of jackpot symbol.
On the other hand, in the limiter inactive big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, only “three big hit symbols” is registered as the type of “big hit symbol”. As a result, when “0” is set in the limiter function operating flag area of the RAM 230 (when the limiter function is not operating), if “big hit” is won by the second special symbol lottery executed, As the type of “big hit symbol”, “three big hit symbols” is selected.
On the other hand, in the limiter operation big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, only “two big hit symbols” is registered as the type of “big hit symbol”. As a result, when “1” is set in the limiter function operating flag area of the RAM 230 (when the limiter function is operating), if “big hit” is won by the first special symbol lottery executed, As the type of “symbol”, “two jackpot symbols” is selected.
On the other hand, in the limiter operation big hit symbol lottery table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, only “four big hit symbols” is registered as the type of “big hit symbol”. As a result, when “1” is set in the limiter function operating flag area of the RAM 230 (when the limiter function is operating), if “big hit” is won by the second special symbol lottery executed, As the type of “symbol”, “4 jackpots” is selected.

In the special special symbol stop symbol determination process, when it is determined that “big hit” (winning) by the special special symbol winning determination, first, the value set in the limiter function operating flag area of the RAM 230 and the preliminary determination start The type of information (Special Figure 1 start information or Special Figure 2 start information) is confirmed, and the jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination start information and the read jackpot symbol lottery table, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined.
On the other hand, in the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination process, when it is determined as “out of” (decision) by the pre-special symbol winning determination, “exclusion symbol” is determined as the stop symbol type.

Next, in the pre-determination process, a first prefetch designation command setting process is executed.
In the first prefetch designation command setting process, the first prefetch designation command for designating the type of the stop symbol determined by the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, in the pre-determination process, it is determined whether or not it is determined as “big hit” (winning) by the pre-special drawing winning determination.
Then, if it is determined that “big hit” (winning) is determined by the pre-special drawing winning determination, the pre-special drawing variation mode determining process at the time of winning is executed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the previous special figure winning determination is “disappearance” (decision), the pre-special drawing variation state determination process at the time of loss is executed.

In the winning special figure variation mode determination process, first, the type of the variation mode (variation mode number) is determined (pre-variation mode determination at the time of winning).
The ROM 220 stores a winning variation mode determination table in which the correspondence between the reach mode random number and the variation mode type (variation mode number) is registered.
In addition, the winning mode variation mode determination table includes the type of jackpot symbol ("one jackpot symbol" to "four jackpot symbol"), the gaming state ("special figure high probability state" or "special symbol low probability state", hourly counter And the winning variation mode determination table corresponding to the combination of the value and the like.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the types of variation modes (variation mode numbers) are “pseudo-continuous variation”, “pseudo-continuous variation 2”, “pseudo-continuous variation 3”, “pseudo-continuous variation 4”, Is stipulated.
In addition, a plurality of variation modes (variation mode numbers) associated with different variation times are defined as the variation modes (variation mode numbers) belonging to the “pseudo-continuous variation”.
The expectation level of each type is, in descending order of expectation, types belonging to “pseudo-continuous 4 variation”, “pseudo-continuous 3 variation”, “pseudo-continuous 2 variation”, and “pseudo-continuous variation” (high expectation level → (Expectation is low).
The “expected degree” refers to the possibility (degree) of occurrence of a big hit gaming state when the type of the variation mode is selected.
In each winning variation mode determination table, the types of variation modes (variation mode numbers) are registered as “pseudo-continuous 2 variation”, “pseudo-continuous 3 variation”, and “pseudo-continuous 4 variation”. ("Fluctuation without quasi-ream" is not registered).

In the pre-variation mode determination at the time of winning, first of all, the type of jackpot symbol determined by the prior special figure stop symbol determination, the gaming state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state", the value of the hourly counter, etc. ) And read the winning variation mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result.
Then, the type (variation mode number) of the variation mode is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the preliminary determination start information and the read variation mode determination table at the time of winning.

In the winning special figure variation mode determination process, next, a second prefetch designation command setting process is executed.
In the second prefetch designation command setting process, a second prefetch designation command for designating the type of variation mode (variation mode number) determined by the pre-variation mode determination at the time of winning is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In the pre-special drawing variation mode determination process at the time of winning, next, the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern is determined (pre-variation pattern determination at the time of winning).
The ROM 220 stores a winning variation pattern determination table in which correspondence between a variation pattern random number and a variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is registered.
Also, the type of jackpot symbol ("one jackpot symbol" to "four jackpot symbols"), gaming state ("special chart high probability state" or "special chart low probability state", hourly counter value, etc.), and fluctuation mode The winning variation pattern determination table corresponding to the combination of each type is stored.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, “variation without reach”, “normal reach variation”, and “super reach variation” are defined as types of variation patterns (variation pattern numbers).
A plurality of variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) associated with different variation times are defined as variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) belonging to “unreachable variation”.
In addition, a plurality of variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) associated with different variation times are defined as variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) belonging to “normal reach variation”.
In addition, as variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) belonging to “super reach variation”, a plurality of variation patterns (variation pattern numbers) associated with different variation times are defined.
In the present embodiment, as a variation pattern (variation pattern number) belonging to “super reach variation”, “super reach variation 1”, “super reach variation 2”, “super reach variation 3”, and “super reach variation 4”. "And" Super reach fluctuation 5 ".
The expectation level of each type is defined to be “super reach fluctuation”, “normal reach fluctuation”, and “non-reach fluctuation” (high expectation → low expectation) in descending order of expectation.
In addition, the expectation level of each variation pattern belonging to “super reach variation” is “super reach variation 5”, “super reach variation 4”, “super reach variation 3”, “super reach variation” in descending order of expectation. 2 ”and“ Super Reach Variation 1 ”(high expectation → low expectation).
The “expected degree” refers to the possibility (degree) that a big hit gaming state will occur when the type of the variation pattern is selected.
In each winning variation pattern determination table, “normal reach variation” and “super reach variation” are registered as variation pattern types (variation pattern numbers) (“reach-less variation” is registered). Not)

In the pre-variation pattern determination at the time of winning, first of all, the type of jackpot symbol determined by the prior special figure stop symbol determination, the gaming state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state", value of the hourly counter, etc. ) And the type of variation mode (variation mode number) determined by the prior variation mode determination at the time of winning, and a winning variation pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the preliminary determination start information and the read variation pattern determination table at the time of winning.

In the pre-special drawing variation mode determination process at the time of winning, a third prefetch designation command setting process is then executed.
In the third prefetch designation command setting process, a third prefetch designation command that designates the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) determined by the pre-variation pattern determination at the time of winning is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

On the other hand, in the prior special figure variation mode determination process at the time of loss, first, the type of reach group random number (“indefinite value” or “fixed value”) included in the pre-determination start information is determined (pre-random number type determination).
In the present embodiment, “undefined value” and “fixed value” are defined as the types of reach group random numbers.
“Undefined value” means that when starting information (Special Figure 1 starting information or Special Figure 2 starting information) is acquired (stored), the type of fluctuation mode (variation mode number) and the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) are determined. It is not changed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation display based on the start information (when executing step S11-7) based on the number of holdings at that time (number of holdings of special figure 1 or special figure 2) The type of mode (variation mode number) and the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) are determined.
“Fixed value” means acquisition of start information (special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) regardless of the number of holdings at the start of special symbol fluctuation display (when step S11-7 is executed). At the time of storage (when executing step S9-8), the type of variation mode (variation mode number) and the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) are determined.
In the present embodiment, the value of the reach group random number is updated within the range of “0” to “10006”. Of “0” to “10006”, “0” to “8499” are “indefinite values”, and “8500” to “10006” are “fixed values”.
Therefore, in the prior random number type determination, when the value of the reach group random number included in the preliminary determination start information is less than “8500”, it is determined as “undefined value”, and the reach group random number included in the preliminary determination start information is determined. When the value is “8500” or more, it is determined as “fixed value”.

In the pre-selection special figure variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, if it is determined as “fixed value” by the pre-random number type determination, pre-reach group determination and pre-change pre-variation mode determination are further executed.
On the other hand, in the advance special figure variation mode determination process at the time of loss, if it is determined as “indefinite value” by the prior random number type determination, the advance reach group determination and the advance variation mode determination at the time of loss are not executed.
In the advance reach group determination, the type of reach group (reach group number) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which correspondences between reach mode random numbers and reach group types (reach group numbers) are registered.
In addition, an indefinite value reach group determination table and a fixed value reach group determination table are stored as the reach group determination table.
In the present embodiment, “reach group 1”, “reach group 2”, and “reach group 3” are defined as the types of reach groups.
In the indefinite value reach group determination table, only “reach group 1” is registered as the reach group type (“reach group 2” and “reach group 3” are not registered).
On the other hand, in the fixed value reach group determination table, only “reach group 2” and “reach group 3” are registered as the reach group type (“reach group 1” is not registered).
As described above, the prior reach group determination is executed only when it is determined as “fixed value” by the prior random number type determination.
In the advance reach group determination, the fixed value reach group determination table is read. Then, the type of the reach group is determined based on the reach group random number included in the pre-determination start information and the read fixed value reach group determination table.

In the pre-change mode determination at the time of loss, the type of change mode (change mode number) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a selection mode change mode determination table in which correspondence between the reach mode random number and the change mode type (change mode number) is registered.
Furthermore, as the loss mode fluctuation mode determination table, “loss mode change mode determination table 1” corresponding to “reach group 1”, “failure change mode determination table 2” corresponding to “reach group 2”, and “reach” "Disappointment variation mode determination table 3" corresponding to "Group 3" is stored.
In addition, as the “Disappointing Fluctuation Mode Determination Table 1”, it corresponds to each combination of the number of holds (Special figure 1 hold number or Special figure 2 hold number) and the execution status (running or stopped) of the time-saving control. The “decision change mode determination table 1” is stored.

In the “decision fluctuation mode determination table 1”, only “no quasi-continuous fluctuation” is registered as the fluctuation mode type (variation mode number) (“pseudo-continuous 2 fluctuation”, “pseudo-continuous 3 fluctuation”). "And" Pseudo-ream 4 variation "are not registered).
Further, the contents of the “decision variable mode determination table 1” corresponding to each number of holds are set so that the variation mode type (variation mode number) associated with a short variation time is selected as the number of suspensions increases. Yes.
In the “decided fluctuation mode determination table 2”, the types of fluctuation modes (fluctuation mode numbers) are registered as “pseudo continuous 2 fluctuation”, “pseudo continuous 3 fluctuation”, and “pseudo continuous 4 fluctuation”. ("Fluctuation without quasi-ream" is not registered).
In the “decided fluctuation mode determination table 3”, the types of fluctuation modes (fluctuation mode numbers) are registered as “pseudo continuous 2 fluctuation”, “pseudo continuous 3 fluctuation”, and “pseudo continuous 4 fluctuation”. ("Fluctuation without quasi-ream" is not registered).

As described above, the pre-change mode determination at the time of loss is performed only when it is determined as “fixed value” by the prior random number type determination.
In the pre-variation mode determination at the time of loss, first, the type of reach group determined by the pre-reach group determination is confirmed, and a loss mode variable mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, the type (variation mode number) of the variation mode is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determination start information and the read selection mode variation mode determination table.

In the special special figure variation mode determination process at the time of loss, next, a second prefetch designation command setting process is executed.
In the second look-ahead designation command setting process, if it is determined as “fixed value” by the prior random number type determination, the second mode for specifying the variation mode type (variation mode number) determined by the prior variation mode determination at the time of defeat is designated. The prefetch designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, when it is determined as “indefinite value” by the prior random number type determination, the second prefetch designation command for designating “indefinite value” is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In the prior special figure variation mode determination process at the time of loss, if it is determined as “fixed value” by the prior random number type determination, the prior variation pattern determination at the time of loss is further executed.
On the other hand, in the prior special figure variation mode determination process at the time of loss, if it is determined as “indefinite value” by the prior random number type determination, the prior variation pattern determination at the time of loss is not executed.
In the prior variation pattern determination at the time of loss, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a loss pattern change pattern determination table in which correspondence between a change pattern random number and a change change pattern type (change pattern number) is registered.
Further, as the change pattern determination table at the time of loss, “change pattern determination table 1 at the time of loss” corresponding to “reach group 1”, “change pattern determination table 2 at time of loss” corresponding to “reach group 2”, and “reach” “Decision change variation pattern determination table 3” corresponding to “Group 3” is stored.
In addition, as the “decision change pattern determination table 1”, it corresponds to each combination of the number of holdings (the number of holdings of special figure 1 or the number of holdings of special figure 2) and the execution status (running or stopped) of the time reduction control. The “decision change pattern determination table 1” is stored.

In the “decision change variation pattern determination table 1”, only “variation without reach” is registered as the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) (“normal reach variation” and “super reach variation” are registered). Not)
In addition, the contents of the “decision change pattern determination table 1” corresponding to each number of holds are set so that the type of change pattern (change pattern number) associated with a shorter change time is selected as the number of holds increases. Yes.
Only “normal reach fluctuation” and “super reach fluctuation” and “super reach fluctuation” are not registered as the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) in the “decision fluctuation pattern determination table 2”. ).
Only “super reach variation” and “normal reach variation” are not registered as the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) in the “decision variation pattern determination table 3”. ).

As described above, the prior variation pattern determination at the time of loss selection is executed only when it is determined as “fixed value” by the prior random number type determination.
In the pre-change pattern determination at the time of loss, first, the type of reach group determined by the pre-reach group determination is confirmed, and a change pattern determination table at the time of loss corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the preliminary determination start information and the read variation pattern determination table at the time of winning.

In the special special figure variation mode determination process at the time of a loss, next, a third prefetch designation command setting process is executed.
In the third look-ahead designation command setting process, if it is determined as “fixed value” by the prior random number type determination, the third pattern designating the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) determined by the prior variation pattern determination at the time of defeat The prefetch designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, when it is determined as “indefinite value” by the prior random number type determination, the third prefetch designation command for designating “indefinite value” is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

As described above, when the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determination start information is “fixed value”, the variation mode type (variation mode number) and the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) are determined, Second and third look-ahead designation commands for designating the determined variation mode type and variation pattern type are transmitted to the effect control circuit 300.
On the other hand, if the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determination start information is “undefined value”, the variation mode type (variation mode number) and the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) are not determined. , Second and third prefetch designation commands for designating “indefinite value” are transmitted to the effect control circuit 300.

Next, the special game management process in step S4-11 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special game management process.
In the present embodiment, as a stage / stage (hereinafter referred to as “special game phase”) of a game (hereinafter referred to as “special game”) executed based on a special symbol lottery, `` Special figure changing state '', `` Special figure stop symbol display state '', `` Big prize opening before opening '', `` Big prize opening opening control state '', `` Large winning opening closed effective state '' and `` Large winning opening closed '' Seven "wait states" are defined.
In the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven special game phases is set.
The ROM 220 stores special game control modules corresponding to each special game phase as special game control modules (programs) for controlling (executing) special games.
In the special game management process, a special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and a process based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-11, as shown in FIG. 18, first, the process proceeds to step S10-1.
In step S10-1, a special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read.
In step S10-3, a special game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game control module execution process, a process based on the special game control module read in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value acquired in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the “special figure change waiting state”, a special figure change waiting process described later is started, and the “special figure change waiting state” is started. In the case of a value corresponding to, a special figure changing process to be described later is started, and in the case of a value corresponding to "special figure stop symbol display state", a special figure stopping process to be described later is started, When the value corresponds to “a state before opening the big prize opening”, a pre-opening process for a special prize opening described later is started. When the value of the winning prize opening control process is started and the value corresponds to the “Large winning opening closed effective state”, the winning opening closing effective process described later is started, and the “Large winning opening open wait state” is entered. When the value is a corresponding value, a special winning opening opening end wait process described later is performed. It is started.

Next, the special figure variation waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation waiting process.
When the special figure variation waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 19, first, the process proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is “1” or more, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is not “1” or more (No). Shifts to step S11-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is “1” or more (Yes), shifts to step S11-3.
In step S11-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is “1” or more, and it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is “1” or more (Yes). In step S11-3, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 holding number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (Yes), the series of processing is terminated and the next processing (step S4-12) is performed. ).

In step S11-3, a special figure hold number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the special figure hold number update process, the special figure hold number (the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number) is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure hold number update process, first, the start information (special figure 1 start) stored in the start information storage area (the special figure 1 start information storage area and the special figure 2 start information storage area) of the RAM 230. Information and special figure 2 start information) is selected as determination start information.
In this embodiment, the start determination for the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area is given priority over the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area. (Special figure winning judgment, special figure stop symbol judgment, special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.) are executed.
Accordingly, when one or more special figure 2 start information is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the first of the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area. Obtained (stored) is selected as the determination start information. That is, the special figure 2 start information stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area is selected as the determination start information.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 start information is not stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area is first acquired (stored). ) Is selected as the determination start information. That is, the special figure 1 start information stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area is selected as the determination start information.
Next, the value of the special figure hold number counter (the special figure 1 hold number counter or the special figure 2 hold number counter) is updated.
Specifically, when the special figure 1 start information is set as the determination start information, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter is newly added to the special figure 1 hold number. Set to counter.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 start information is determined start information, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter is newly set in the special figure 2 hold number counter. To do.
Next, the determination start information storage area is changed (shifted) from the start information storage area (the special figure 1 start information storage area or the special figure 2 start information storage area) to the changing start information storage area.
Specifically, when the special figure 2 start information is determined start information, the special figure 2 start information (determination start information) stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area is Store (shift) in the starting information storage area during fluctuation. Further, when the special figure 2 start information is stored in the second storage part to the fourth storage part of the special figure 2 start information storage area, the special figure 2 start information stored in each storage part is The data is stored (shifted) in the storage unit that has a higher priority than the storage unit.
On the other hand, when the special figure 1 start information is determined start information, the special figure 1 start information (determination start information) stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area is used as the start during fluctuation. Store (shift) in the information storage area. In addition, when the special figure 1 start information is stored in the second storage part to the fourth storage part of the special figure 1 start information storage area, the special figure 1 start information stored in each storage part is The data is stored (shifted) in the storage unit that has a higher priority than the storage unit.

In step S11-4, a special figure winning determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the special symbol winning determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special symbol winning determination).
In the special figure winning determination process, the value set in the setting information storage area (setting value) and the current gaming state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state") are confirmed. Then, the special drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the determination start information and the read special symbol winning lottery table, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is “big hit” (special symbol winning determination).
Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the determination start information matches the jackpot value registered in the read special symbol winning lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is set to “big hit” ( It is determined that (winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the judgment start information does not match the jackpot value registered in the read special figure winning lottery table (if it matches the outlier value), the special symbol lottery The result is determined as “out of” (decision).

In step S11-5, a special figure stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6.
In the special figure stop symbol determination process, first, the type of stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (special symbol stop symbol determination).
In other words, if it is determined that “big hit” (winning) is determined by the special symbol winning determination, the type of “big winning symbol” is determined.
Specifically, first, the value set in the limiter function operating flag area of the RAM 230 and the type of judgment start information (special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) are confirmed, and this confirmation is made. The jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the result is read. Then, the type of the big hit symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the determination start information and the read big hit symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined as “disappearance” (decision) by the special symbol winning determination, “disappearing symbol” is determined as the stop symbol type.

In the special figure stop symbol determination process, next, a special symbol stop symbol (seg data / stop symbol number) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a seg data table in which correspondences between hit symbol random numbers and stop symbols (seg data / stop symbol numbers) are registered.
In addition, as a seg data table, a winning seg data table corresponding to a case where a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is won, and a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) A lost selection seg data table corresponding to the case of being lost in symbol lottery is stored.
Furthermore, a winning seg data table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and a winning seg data table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are stored as the winning seg data table.
In order to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol, first, the result of the special symbol failure determination is confirmed.
Then, when it is determined as “big hit” (winning) by the special figure winning determination, the type of determination starting information (special figure 1 starting information or special figure 2 starting information) is further confirmed, and this confirmation result is obtained. Read the corresponding winning seg data table. Then, a stop symbol (seg data / stop symbol number) is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the determination start information and the read winning seg data table.
On the other hand, if it is determined as “out of” (decision) by the special figure winning determination, the seg data table at the time of selection is read. Then, the stop symbol (seg data / stop symbol number) is determined on the basis of the winning symbol random number included in the determination start information and the read-off seg data table.
In the special symbol stop symbol determination process, the determined stop symbol (seg data / stop symbol number) is then stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.

In step S11-6, a symbol type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the symbol type designation command setting process, a symbol type designation command for designating the type of the stop symbol determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-7, special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, the variation mode (variation mode type and variation pattern type) of the special symbol is determined.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process, it is determined whether or not “big hit” (winning) is determined by the special figure winning determination. Then, when it is determined that “big hit” (winning) is determined by the special figure winning determination, the special figure fluctuation mode determining process at the time of winning is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure winning determination is “out of” (decision), the special figure fluctuation state determination process at the time of loss is executed.

In the winning special figure variation mode determination process, first, the type of variation mode (variation mode number) is determined (variation mode determination at the time of winning).
In the winning variation mode determination, the type of jackpot symbol determined by the special figure stop symbol determination and the gaming state ("special figure high probability state" or "special figure low probability state", hourly counter value, etc.), After confirmation, the winning variation mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the determination start information and the read winning variation mode determination table, the variation mode type (variation mode number) is determined.
In the winning special figure variation mode determination process, next, the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is determined (variation pattern determination at the time of winning).
In the winning variation pattern determination, the type of jackpot symbol determined by the special symbol stop symbol determination, the gaming state ("Special figure high probability state" or "Special figure low probability state", the value of the short time counter, etc.), and the winning The type of variation mode (variation mode number) determined by the time variation mode determination is confirmed, and a winning variation pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read.
Then, the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the determination start information and the read variation pattern determination table at the time of winning.

On the other hand, in the special figure change mode determination process at the time of loss, first, the type (“indefinite value” or “fixed value”) of the reach group random number included in the determination start information is determined (random number type determination).
In the random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number included in the determination start information is less than “8500”, it is determined as “undefined value”, and the value of the reach group random number included in the determination start information is “8500”. When it is above, it is determined as “fixed value”.
In the special figure change mode determination process at the time of loss, next, the type of reach group (reach group number) is determined (reach group determination).
In the reach group determination, when it is determined as “fixed value” by the random number type determination, the fixed value reach group determination table is read. Then, the type of the reach group is determined based on the reach group random number included in the determination start information and the read fixed value reach group determination table.
On the other hand, when it is determined as “indefinite value” by the random number type determination, the indefinite value reach group determination table is read. Then, the type of reach group is determined based on the reach group random number included in the determination start information and the read indefinite value reach group determination table.
In the special figure change mode determination process at the time of loss, next, the type of change mode (change mode number) is determined (change mode determination at the time of loss).
In the loss mode change mode determination, when it is determined as “fixed value” by the random number type determination, the reach group type determined by the reach group determination is confirmed, and the loss mode change mode determination corresponding to the confirmation result Read the table. Then, the type (variation mode number) of the variation mode is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the determination start information and the read variation mode determination table at the time of loss.
On the other hand, when it is determined as “undefined value” by the random number type determination, the type of the reach group determined by the reach group determination, the number of holdings (the number of holdings in FIG. 1 or the number of holdings in FIG. 2), and time reduction control The execution state (during execution or stoppage) is confirmed, and the selection mode change mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, the type (variation mode number) of the variation mode is determined based on the reach mode random number included in the determination start information and the read variation mode determination table at the time of loss.
In the special figure change mode determination process at the time of loss, next, the type (change pattern number) of the change pattern is determined (change pattern determination at the time of loss).
In the change pattern determination at the time of loss selection, if it is determined as “fixed value” by the random number type determination, the type of reach group determined by the reach group determination is confirmed, and the fluctuation pattern determination at the time of loss corresponding to this confirmation result Read the table. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the determination start information and the read-out fluctuation pattern determination table, the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined as “undefined value” by the random number type determination, the type of the reach group determined by the reach group determination, the number of holdings (the number of holdings in FIG. 1 or the number of holdings in FIG. 2), and time reduction control The execution state (during execution or stoppage) is confirmed, and the selection pattern variation pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the determination start information and the read-out fluctuation pattern determination table, the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is determined.

In step S11-8, a variation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the variation pattern command setting process, a variation mode designation command for designating the variation mode type (variation mode number) determined in step S11-7 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, the variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) determined in step S11-7 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-9, a special figure variation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the special figure variation time setting process, the variation time (hereinafter referred to as “variation time 1”) corresponding to the variation mode type (variation mode number) determined in step S11-7 is acquired. Also, a variation time (hereinafter referred to as “variation time 2”) corresponding to the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) determined in step S11-7 is acquired. Then, the total time of the obtained fluctuation time 1 and fluctuation time 2 is calculated. Then, the calculated total time is set in the special game timer.

In step S11-10, special figure fluctuation display data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the special figure fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the special figure display timer.
Next, when the judgment start information is the special figure 1 start information, predetermined segment data is set as the segment data corresponding to the special figure 1 display device. Thereby, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the set segment data is controlled to be lit.
On the other hand, when the determination start information is the special figure 2 start information, predetermined segment data is set as the segment data corresponding to the special figure 2 display device. Thereby, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the set segment data is controlled to be lit.

In step S11-11, a hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the number-of-holds designation command setting process, a number-of-holds designation command that designates that the number of special figure holds (number of special figure 1 hold or number of special figure 2 hold) has decreased by “1” is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do. At this time, if the judgment start information is the special figure 1 start information, the pending number designation command for designating that the special figure 1 pending number has decreased by "1" is stored in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230, If the judgment start information is the special figure 2 start information, a hold number designation command for designating that the special figure 2 hold number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S11-12, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “special figure changing state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the special figure changing process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special figure changing process.
When the special figure changing process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 20, first, the process proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S12-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-4.
In step S12-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure display timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S12- If it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S12-3, a special figure fluctuation display data update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special figure fluctuation display data update processing, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the special figure display device is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation display data update process, when the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the segment data corresponding to the special figure 1 display device is updated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the segment data corresponding to the special symbol 2 display device is updated.

In step S12-4, a special figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-5. In the special figure stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol (seg data / stop symbol number) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, when the variable display of the first special symbol is terminated, the acquired segment data (or the segment data corresponding to the acquired stop symbol number) is set as the segment data corresponding to the special symbol 1 display device. Thereby, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the set segment data is controlled to be lit (stop display).
On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is terminated, the acquired segment data (or the segment data corresponding to the acquired stop symbol number) is set as the segment data corresponding to the special symbol 2 display device. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the set segment data is subjected to lighting control (stop display).
In step S12-5, a special figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-6. In the special figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer.
In step S12-6, a stop designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-7. In the stop specification command setting process, the stop specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a predetermined number (1 [times] in the present embodiment) is added to the value of the external information determination number counter.
In step S12-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “special figure stop symbol display state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the special figure stopping process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the special figure stopping process.
When the special figure stopping process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 21, first, the process proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-2. When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S13-2, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol type is “hit symbol”. If it is determined that the stop symbol type is not “hit symbol” (No), the process proceeds to step S13-3. If it is determined that the stop symbol type is “big hit symbol” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-6.
In step S13-3, it is determined whether or not the time reduction control is being executed. If it is determined that the time reduction control is being executed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-4 and the time reduction control is being executed. If not (No), the process proceeds to step S13-5.
Here, if “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, it is determined that the time reduction control is being executed, and if “0” is set, execution of the time reduction control is executed. Judge that it is not in.

In step S13-4, a time reduction control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the time reduction control management process, it is determined whether or not the time reduction control is terminated.
Specifically, in the time reduction control management process, first, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value of the time reduction counter is newly set as the value of the time reduction counter.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (Yes), “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 (time reduction control is stopped). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter is not “0”, a state where “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 is maintained (a state where the time reduction control is being executed is maintained). .
In step S13-5, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “special figure change waiting state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S13-6, a game state update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, first, “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230.
Next, the value set in the special figure high probability state flag area of the RAM 230 is confirmed.
When “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (when the “special figure low probability state” is occurring), the “big hit symbol” determined in step S11-5 is further performed. ”Is confirmed. When the type of “big hit symbol” determined in step S11-5 is “one big hit symbol” or “three big hit symbols”, the value of the limiter count counter is set to a predetermined limiter count (in this embodiment, 3 [times]). On the other hand, when the type of “big hit symbol” determined in step S11-5 is “two big hit symbols”, the value of the limiter number counter is not set.
On the other hand, when “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (when the “special figure high probability state” is occurring), “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area. To do.
Next, the value of the limiter function operating flag area of the RAM 230 is confirmed. If “1” is set in the limiter function operating flag area, “0” is set in the limiter function operating flag area.

In step S13-7, a special power control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-8. In the special electric combination control data setting process, control data for opening and closing the special electric combination 53a is set.
The ROM 220 stores special power control tables corresponding to various types of “hit symbols”. Each special power control table includes a special winning opening closing effective time, a special winning opening closing time, the number of round games, the number of opening / closing switching corresponding to each round game, and control data (solenoid) corresponding to each opening / closing switching. Control data, control time data) and the like.
In the special power control data setting process, the special power control table corresponding to the type of “big hit symbol” determined in step S11-5 is read, and the read special power control table is used as the special power control table in the RAM 230. Set to area.
Next, “0” is set in the special electric utility continuous operation number counter.

In step S13-8, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-9. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-9, an opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command for designating the type of “big hit symbol” determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Also, a predetermined number (1 [sphere] in the present embodiment) is added to the value of the external information jackpot counter.
In step S13-10, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “pre-big prize opening state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the big winning opening opening pre-processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the special winning opening.
When the big prize opening pre-processing is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 22, first, the process proceeds to step S14-1.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S14-2. When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S14-2, a special electric combination continuous operation number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric power continuous operation frequency counter update process, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value set in the special electric power continuous operation frequency counter is newly set in the special electric power continuous operation frequency counter.
In step S14-3, a round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start designation command setting process, the round start designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, a special electric utility opening / closing switching frequency setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special power combination opening / closing switching number setting process, the special power combination control table set in the special power combination control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the number of opening / closing switching corresponding to the value of the special power combination continuous operation number counter is read. . Then, the read opening / closing switching frequency is set in the special electric utility switching frequency counter.
Next, “0” is set as the value of the special electric winning prize counter.
In step S14-5, a special power combination opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric role opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “big winning opening release control state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the special power combination opening / closing switching process of steps S14-5 and S16-3 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special power combination opening / closing switching process.
When the special power combination opening / closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5 and S16-3, the process first proceeds to step S15-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special power utility switching frequency counter is “0”, and when it is determined that the value of the special power service switching frequency counter is not “0” (No). Moves to step S15-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric power switch on / off switching counter is “0” (Yes), the series of processing ends and the next processing (step S14-6) Alternatively, the process proceeds to S16-4).
In step S15-2, a special power combination control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric combination control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric combination 53a to the open state or the closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special power control data setting process, a special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the solenoid corresponding to the value of the special power on / off switching counter Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data designating energization or deenergization) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the special winning opening solenoid 65 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to be in an open state or a closed state.

In step S15-3, a special power control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special power control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special power combination control time setting process, the special power role control table set in the special power role control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the control corresponding to the value of the special power role opening / closing switching frequency counter is referred to. Read time. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer.
In step S15-4, a special power combination opening / closing switching number counter update process is executed, a series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S14-6 or S16-4). In the special electric utility switching frequency counter updating process, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special electric power switching frequency counter is newly set in the special electric power switching frequency counter.

Next, the special winning opening opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening control process.
When the big prize opening opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 24, first, the process proceeds to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special power combination switching frequency counter is “0”, and when it is determined that the value of the special power switching frequency counter is not “0” (No). The process proceeds to step S16-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric power switching on / off counter is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, a special power combination opening / closing switching process (see FIG. 23) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special power prize winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (10 [ball] in the present embodiment). If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning prize counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S16-5, a special winning opening opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the special winning opening opening control end process, solenoid control data for designating the energization stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to be closed.
In step S16-6, a special winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the special winning opening closing time setting process, the special winning combination closing effective time (interval time) is obtained by referring to the special electronic control table set in the special electric control table area of the RAM 230, and the special game timer. Set to.
In step S16-7, a round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end designation command setting process, the round end designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “big winning opening closed effective state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the special winning opening closing effective process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening closing effective process.
When the big winning opening closing effective process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 25, first, the process proceeds to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-2. When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).
In step S17-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special power combination continuous operation number counter has reached a specified value, and when it is determined that the value of the special power combination continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No ), The process proceeds to step S17-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric power continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-5.
Here, referring to the special power combination control table set in the special power role control table area of the RAM 230, the number of round games defined in the special power role control table is acquired as a specified value to make a determination. .
In step S17-3, a special winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-4. In the special winning opening closing time setting process, a special winning combination closing time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special electric control table set in the special electric control control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-4, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “pre-big prize opening state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S17-5, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the ending time setting process, a special ending time is set in the special game timer with reference to a special power control table set in the special power control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-6, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the ending designation command setting process, the ending designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-7, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “big winning opening free wait state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the special winning opening free weighting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening free weighting process.
When the big prize opening opening end weight process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 26, first, the process proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S18-2. When it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12).

In step S18-2, a game state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the game state setting process, the game state is set.
Specifically, in the gaming state setting process, first, the value of the special figure high probability state flag in the RAM 230 is set according to the type of the “big hit symbol” determined in step S11-5.
At this time, when the type of “big hit symbol” determined in step S11-5 is “one big hit symbol” or “three big hit symbols”, “1” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area of the RAM 230. To do. This causes a “special figure high probability state”. On the other hand, when the type of “big hit symbol” determined in step S11-5 is “two big hit symbols” or “four big hit symbols”, “0” is set in the special figure high probability state flag area of the RAM 230. . This causes a “special figure low probability state”.
Next, a predetermined time reduction number is set in the time reduction counter, and “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230. As a result, the time reduction control is started.
At this time, when the type of “big hit symbol” determined in step S11-5 is “one big hit symbol” or “three big hit symbols”, 10000 [times] is set as the number of time reductions. On the other hand, when the type of “big hit symbol” determined in step S11-5 is “two big hit symbols” or “four big hit symbols”, 100 [times] is set as the number of time reductions.
Next, when the type of “big hit symbol” determined in step S11-5 is “one big hit symbol” or “three big hit symbols”, “1” is subtracted from the value of the limiter count counter. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the limiter number counter after subtraction is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the limiter count counter after subtraction is “0”, “1” is set in the limiter function operating flag area of the RAM 230. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the limiter count counter after subtraction is not “0” (“1” or more), the state where “0” is set in the limiter function operating flag area is maintained.
Next, a value corresponding to the type of “big hit symbol” determined in step S11-5 is set in the previous big hit symbol flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S18-3, a special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-12). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “special figure change waiting state” is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal game management process in step S4-12 will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the normal game management process.
Here, in this embodiment, as the stage / stage (hereinafter referred to as “normal game phase”) of the game (hereinafter referred to as “normal game phase”) executed based on the normal symbol lottery, `` Status '', `` Normal diagram changing status '', `` Normal diagram stop symbol display status '', `` Multi-plan electric accessory release state '', `` Multi-plan electric feature release control status '', `` Multi-plan electric feature closure enabled Seven states are defined: “state” and “usually waiting state for opening the electric accessory release”.
Then, a value (ordinary game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
The ROM 220 stores a normal game control module corresponding to each normal game phase as a normal game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the normal game.
In the normal game management process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and the process based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-12, the process first proceeds to step S19-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S19-1, a normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal game phase) set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, a normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value acquired in step S19-1 (normal game phase) is read.
In step S19-3, a normal game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game control module execution process, a process based on the normal game control module read in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value acquired in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the “waiting state for normal map change”, a process for waiting for a normal map change to be described later is started, and the “current state for normal map change” is started. In the case of a value corresponding to, the process of changing the normal map described later is started, and in the case of the value corresponding to the "general map stop symbol display state", the process of stopping the normal map described later is started, When it is a value corresponding to “a state before opening an ordinary electric accessory”, a normal electric accessory opening pre-processing described later is started, and when it is a value corresponding to “an ordinary electric accessory opening control state”. When the normal electric actor release control process described later is started and the value corresponds to the “normal electric actor closing effective state”, the normal electric actor closing effective process described later is started, If the value corresponds to the `` object release end wait state '', Electric won game open end wait process is started.

Next, the process of waiting for a change in the normal map executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a normal variation waiting process.
When the normal variation waiting process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 28, the process first proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the pending map counter is “1” or more, and when it is determined that the value of the pending map counter is “1” or more (Yes). , The process proceeds to step S20-2, and if it is determined that the value of the general-purpose hold number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13) To do.
In step S20-2, a general-purpose hold number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the general figure hold number update process, the general figure hold number is updated.
Specifically, in the normal figure reservation number update process, one start information among the general figure start information stored in the normal start information storage area of the RAM 230 is selected as determination start information.
In the present embodiment, the universal chart start information acquired (stored) first among the general chart start information stored in the universal chart start information storage area is selected as the determination start information.

In step S20-3, a normal winning determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the normal figure winning determination process, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined (normal figure winning determination).
The ROM 220 stores a common symbol winning lottery table in which the winning symbol of the normal symbol lottery is registered. In addition, as a common figure winning lottery table, a common figure winning lottery table corresponding to the execution of the time reduction control and a common figure winning lottery table corresponding to the stoppage of the time reduction control are stored.
In the common-place winning lottery table corresponding to the stoppage of the short-time control, the winning value is registered so that the winning probability is the first probability (1/99 in this embodiment). On the other hand, the win value is registered so that the winning probability is a second probability (1/1 in the present embodiment) higher than the first probability in the common figure winning lottery table corresponding to the execution of the short-time control. ing.
Then, in the normal figure winning determination process, the normal figure winning lottery table is determined based on the winning random number included in the determination start information and the normal figure winning lottery table corresponding to the current execution status (execution or stoppage). Make a decision.
Specifically, when the value of the winning random number included in the determination start information matches the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined as “winning” (winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the winning random number included in the determination start information does not match the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined to be “out” (losing).

In step S20-4, a common figure stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the general symbol stop symbol determination process, the type (stop symbol number) of the normal symbol stop symbol is determined (normal symbol stop symbol determination).
Specifically, in the general symbol stop symbol determination process, if it is determined to be “winning” (winning) by the common symbol winning determination, “stop per symbol” is set as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number). judge.
On the other hand, if it is determined as “out of” (decision) by the normal symbol winning determination, “out of symbol” is determined as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number).
Next, the determined stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
In step S20-5, a normal fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the normal pattern variation pattern determination process, the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined (normal pattern variation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal map variation pattern determination process, when the time reduction control is stopped, the first type (2.0 in the present embodiment) is set as the type of the general map variation pattern (variation pattern number). The type corresponding to the variation time of [s] is determined.
On the other hand, when the time-shortening control is being executed, the second type (in this embodiment, the type corresponding to the fluctuation time of 0.5 [s]) is used as the type of the normal fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number). Determine.

In step S20-6, a normal time change time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the usual figure fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the type of the usual figure fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) determined in step S20-6 is acquired. And the acquired fluctuation | variation time is set to a normal game timer.
In step S20-7, a map change display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the general map display data setting process, data for controlling the variable display of the general map display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal map display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the general map display timer.
Next, predetermined segment data is set as segment data corresponding to the common map display device. As a result, the segment corresponding to the set segment data is controlled to be lit out of a predetermined number of segments constituting the general-purpose display device.
In step S20-8, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “normal state changing state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the process during normal map change executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a process during normal map change.
When the normal map changing process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 29, first, the process proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2. When it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the common map display timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the general map display timer is “0” (Yes), step S21− When the process proceeds to 3 and it is determined that the value of the normal display timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S21-3, a normal map display data update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the general map display data update process, data for controlling the variable display of the general map display device is updated.
Specifically, in the general map change display data update process, the segment data corresponding to the general map display device is updated.

In step S21-4, a normal stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the general map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the general map display device is set.
Specifically, in the general symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol (seg data) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, the acquired segment data (segment data related to the stop symbol) is set as segment data corresponding to the general-purpose display device. As a result, the segment corresponding to the set segment data is controlled to be turned on (stopped display) among a predetermined number of segments constituting the general-purpose display device.
In step S21-5, a normal stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the usual stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “normal game stop symbol display state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the routine stoppage process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing processing during a normal stoppage.
When the normal map stop process is executed in step S19-3, the process first proceeds to step S22-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is “per symbol”. If it is determined that the stop symbol is not “per symbol” (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3. If it is determined that the stop symbol is “per symbol” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “normal state waiting state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-4, normal electric control data setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the ordinary electric combination control data setting process, control data for opening and closing the ordinary electric combination 52a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a normal power control table corresponding to the execution status (during execution or stoppage) of the time reduction control. Each normal power control table includes a time before opening a normal power, a normal power close effective time, an open end wait time, the number of opening / closing switching, and control data corresponding to each opening / closing switching (solenoid control data, control time). Data).
In the normal power combination control data setting process, the normal power role control table corresponding to the execution status (execution or stoppage) of the short time control is read, and the read normal power role control table is read in the normal power role control table area of the RAM 230. Set.
Next, the number of times of opening / closing switching is read with reference to the normal power control table set in the normal power control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read opening / closing switching frequency is set in the normal electric utility switching frequency counter. Also, “0” is set as the value of the ordinary electric winning prize counter.

In step S22-5, a normal electric utility opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the normal power combination opening time setting process, a predetermined normal power combination release time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal power control table set in the normal power control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “state before the normal electric game object is released” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a process for releasing a normal electric accessory.
When the normal electric accessory release pre-processing is executed in step S19-3, the process first proceeds to step S23-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S23-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S23-2, a normal power combination opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The normal power combination opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “ordinary electric accessory release control state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal electric combination opening / closing switching process in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the normal power combination opening / closing switching process.
When the normal power combination opening / closing switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, as shown in FIG. 32, first, the process proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter is “0”, and when it is determined that the value of the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter is not “0” (No). Shifts to step S24-2, and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric utility opening / closing switching number counter is “0” (Yes), the series of processing is terminated and the next processing (step S23-3) is performed. Alternatively, the process proceeds to S25-4).
In step S24-2, an ordinary electronic combination control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the ordinary electric combination control data setting process, control data for controlling the ordinary electric combination 52a to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal power combination control data setting process, a solenoid corresponding to the value of the normal power combination open / close switching number counter is referred to by referring to the normal power combination control table set in the normal power combination control table area of the RAM 230. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data designating energization or deenergization) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the ordinary electric accessory 52a is controlled to be in an open state or a closed state.

In step S24-3, a normal power combination control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric control time setting process, a control time for continuing control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal power combination control time setting process, the control corresponding to the value of the normal power combination open / close switching counter is referred to by referring to the normal power control table set in the normal power control table area of the RAM 230. Read time. Then, the read control time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4). In the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter is newly set in the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter.

Next, the ordinary electric accessory release control process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory release control process.
When the ordinary electric accessory release control process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 33, first, the process proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter is “0”, and when it is determined that the value of the normal power combination opening / closing switching number counter is not “0” (No). The process proceeds to step S25-3, and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary power combination switching number counter is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, a normal power combination opening / closing switching process (see FIG. 32) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary electronic winning prize counter has reached a predetermined upper limit (3 [ball] in the present embodiment), and the value of the ordinary electric winning prize counter is predetermined. If it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5, and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary electronic winning prize counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Terminates the series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).

In step S25-5, a normal electric utility release control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal power combination release control end process, solenoid control data for designating the energization stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the ordinary electric accessory 52a is controlled to be closed.
In step S25-6, normal electric utility closing effective time setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the normal power combination closing valid time setting process, a normal power combination closing effective time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal power combination control table set in the normal power control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S25-7, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “normal electric accessory closing valid state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal electric accessory closing effective process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory closing effective process.
When the normal electric accessory closing effective process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 34, first, the process proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S26-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S26-2, an opening end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the opening end wait time setting process, a predetermined opening end waiting time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal power combination control table set in the normal power combination control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S26-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “ordinary electric accessory release end wait state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the ordinary electric accessory opening end weight process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the ordinary electric accessory release end weight process.
When the ordinary electric accessory release end weight process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 35, first, the process proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S27-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not “0” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S27-2, a normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the “normal state waiting state” is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the performance display device control process in step S4-19 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the performance display device control process.
The performance display device control process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61. That is, the performance display device control process is based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device control process is called during the execution of the timer interrupt process.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-19, the process proceeds to step S28-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S28-1, stack pointer saving processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-2. In the stack pointer saving process, the value of the stack pointer used in the processing based on the program stored in the use area m1 is saved in the RAM saving area.
In step S28-2, a register saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-3. In the register saving process, the register value used in the processing based on the program stored in the use area m1 is saved in the RAM saving area.
In step S28-3, a ball number addition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-4.
In the ball number addition process, the value stored in the out ball number addition value storage area of the RAM 230 is added to the value of the out ball number counter.
Next, the value stored in the payout amount addition value storage area of the RAM 230 is added to the value of the payout number counter.
In step S28-4, a base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-5. The base ratio calculation process will be described later.

In step S28-5, a performance display device display process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-6. In the performance display device display process, the performance display device 61 sets control data for displaying the base ratio.
Specifically, in the performance display device display process, in the performance display device data signal control data setting area, the base ratio calculated in step S38-4 (the current base ratio in the current section) or step S38-2. The performance display device data signal control data corresponding to the base ratio (final base ratio of the previous section) stored in (1) is set.
Thus, according to the performance display device data signal control data set in the performance display device data signal control data setting area, in the performance display device 61, the current base ratio of the current section or the final section of the previous section The base ratio is displayed.
At this time, in the performance display device 61, the current base ratio of the current section and the final base ratio of the previous section are alternately displayed every predetermined time so that the current base ratio of the current section is displayed. The performance display device data signal control data corresponding to the base ratio and the performance display device data signal control data corresponding to the final base ratio of the previous section are alternately set every predetermined time.

In step S28-6, a register restoration process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-7. In the register restoration process, the register value saved in step S28-2 (the register value used in the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) is restored.
In step S28-7, stack pointer return processing is executed, a series of processing ends, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (step S4-20). In the stack pointer restoration process, the value of the stack pointer saved in step S28-1 (the value of the stack pointer used in the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) is restored.

Next, the base ratio calculation process in step S28-4 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the base ratio calculation process.
The base ratio calculation process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 61. That is, the base ratio calculation process is a process based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The base ratio calculation process is called during execution of the performance display device control process.
When the base ratio calculation process is called in step S28-4, the process proceeds to step S38-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S38-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the out ball counter has reached the reference value. If it is determined that the value of the out ball counter has reached the reference value (Yes), step S38 is performed. -2 and if it is determined that the value of the out-ball number counter has not reached the reference value (No), the process proceeds to step S38-4.
In this embodiment, the reference value = 60000 × n (n = integer). “N” is a value indicating the current section, and “1” is set as an initial value.
In step S38-2, a base ratio storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-3. In the base ratio storage process, the base ratio calculated in the previous base ratio calculation process (step S38-4) is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 as the final base ratio of the previous section. Also, the value of the payout counter is reset (“0” is set as the payout counter value).
In step S38-3, a reference value update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-4. In the reference value update process, “1” is added to the value (n) indicating the current section. Thereby, the reference value is updated.
In step S38-4, a base ratio calculation process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-5). In the base ratio calculation process, the base ratio is calculated based on the value of the out ball counter and the value of the payout counter.

(Various effects executed in the pachinko machine 1)
Next, various effects performed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
First, a hold effect (hold display) executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, each start information (the special figure 1 start information or the special figure 2 start information) stored in the start information storage area (the special figure 1 start information storage area and the special figure 2 start information storage area) is targeted. The hold effect is executed.
The holding effect is that a special symbol notification display (starting determination) based on the start information (hereinafter referred to as “holding effect target start information”) that is the target of the holding effect is held, or the holding effect. It is an effect that suggests (notifies) that a special symbol notification display based on the target start information is being executed.
In the hold effect, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display areas b1 to b3.

Specifically, in the reserved symbol display area b2, as the display position (display unit) where the reserved symbol h is displayed, four storage units (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) of the special figure 1 start information storage region ) Is specified for each display position.
In the reserved symbol display area b3, each of the four storage units (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) of the special figure 2 start information storage region is used as a display position (display unit) where the reserved symbol h is displayed. The display position corresponding to is defined.
And in the hold effect which uses the special figure 1 start information as the target hold effect target start information, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display areas b1 and b2.
That is, during the period in which the hold production target start information is stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area (the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit) (after the acquisition of the hold production target start information, During the period before the start determination based on), the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display area b2.
At this time, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage unit (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) in which the hold effect target start information is stored.
On the other hand, during the period when the hold production target start information is stored in the changing start information storage area (after the start determination based on the hold production target start information is executed, the special symbol notification display based on the hold production target start information ends. In the period up to), the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display area b1.
On the other hand, in the hold effect using the special figure 2 start information as the hold effect target start information, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display areas b1 and b3.
That is, during the period in which the hold production target start information is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area (the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit) (after acquisition of the hold production target start information, During the period before the start determination based on), the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display area b3.
At this time, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage unit (first storage unit to fourth storage unit) in which the hold effect target start information is stored.
On the other hand, during the period when the hold production target start information is stored in the changing start information storage area (after the start determination based on the hold production target start information is executed, the special symbol notification display based on the hold production target start information ends. In the period up to), the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed in the hold symbol display area b1.

For example, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored as special figure 1 start information in the third storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area, and a holding effect for the special figure 1 start information is provided. When executed, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the third storage unit in the hold symbol display area b2 in response to the start of the hold effect.
Thereafter, the display area of the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information in response to the storage area storing the hold effect target start information being changed (shifted) from the third storage unit to the second storage unit. However, the display position corresponding to the third storage unit is changed (shifted) to the display position corresponding to the second storage unit.
In addition, when the storage area for storing the hold effect target start information is changed (shifted) from the second storage unit to the first storage unit, the display area of the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information However, the display position corresponding to the second storage unit is changed (shifted) to the display position corresponding to the first storage unit.
Further, the storage area for storing the hold production target start information is changed (shifted) from the special figure 1 start information storage area (first storage unit) to the changing start information storage area. The display area of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the start information is changed (shifted) from the reserved symbol display area b2 (display position corresponding to the first storage unit) to the reserved symbol display area b1.
Then, in response to the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on the hold effect target start information, the display of the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information in the hold symbol display area b1 is ended, whereby the hold effect ends. To do.

In the present embodiment, a normal hold effect and a hold notice effect are defined as the types of hold effects.
“Normal hold effect” is a type of hold effect that does not suggest the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the hold effect target start information.
In the present embodiment, “white”, “blue”, “green”, “purple”, and “red” are defined as colors (types) of the reserved symbol h.
In the normal hold effect, a “white” hold symbol h is displayed as the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target start information. In the normal holding effect, the color of the holding symbol h corresponding to the holding effect target start information remains “white” and does not change.
In the normal hold effect, the hold effect target start information (Special Figure 1 start information or Special Figure 2 start information) is stored in the start information storage area (Special Figure 1 start information storage area or Special Figure 2 start information storage area). Is started in response to the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on the hold production target start information.

The “pending notice effect” is a kind of prefetch notice effect. In other words, the hold notice effect is a type of hold effect that suggests the result of prior determination (step S9-8) based on predetermined start information by the form of the hold symbol h corresponding to the start information.
In the following description, the start information targeted for the hold notice effect is referred to as “hold notice target start information”. Further, the holding symbol h corresponding to the holding notice target start information is referred to as a notice target holding symbol hy.
In the present embodiment, the hold notice effect is an effect that suggests a result of the prior special symbol stop symbol determination based on the hold notice target start information (specifically, the possibility of being a “hit symbol”).
It should be noted that the hold notice effect may be configured to suggest a result of the prior special figure fluctuation pattern determination based on the hold notice target start information (specifically, the possibility of “super reach change”).
In the hold notice effect, the color of the notice target hold symbol hy changes. That is, in the hold notice effect, the color of the notice target hold symbol hy changes to any one of “blue”, “green”, “purple”, and “red”. In the hold notice effect, the result of the preliminary determination based on the hold notice object start information (specifically, the big hit expectation) is suggested by the color of the notice object hold symbol hy that finally changes.

Here, the jackpot expectation degree of each color of the reserved symbol h (preliminary subject reserved symbol hy) is “red”, “purple”, “green”, “blue”, “white” ( It is defined that the expectation level for jackpot is high → the expectation level for jackpot is low.
In other words, each color of the reserved symbol h (preliminary subject reserved symbol hy) is previously graded (ranked) based on the expectation of jackpot. At this time, the stage (order) of each color of the reserved symbol h is “red” (fifth stage), “purple” (fourth stage), “green” (third stage) in descending order of the stage (rank). ), “Blue” (second stage), and “white” (first stage) (step high → step low).
The “big hit expectation degree” refers to the possibility (degree) of occurrence of a big hit gaming state. In other words, the jackpot expectation degree of each color of the reserved symbol h is the possibility (degree) of occurrence of a big hit gaming state when the color is selected as the final color of the reserved symbol h (notification target reserved symbol hy). Say.

When the hold notice effect is executed, one or a plurality of hold change triggers and hold change contents corresponding to each hold change trigger are set. In the hold notice effect, the color of the notice target hold symbol hy changes according to the hold change content corresponding to the hold change trigger in accordance with the arrival of each hold change trigger.
The “holding change opportunity” is an opportunity for the color of the notice target holding symbol hy to change. Further, the “holding change content” is a content in which the color of the notice target holding symbol hy changes.
In the present embodiment, as a change change opportunity, a start time of a variation effect corresponding to each preceding hold information, a start time of a change effect corresponding to the hold notice target start information, and the like are defined. When the hold notice effect is executed, one or more hold change triggers are set from these hold change triggers.
In the present embodiment, the hold notice effect is executed only for the special figure 2 start information among the special figure 1 start information and the special figure 2 start information.

Next, the accessory continuous notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The “actual material continuous notice effect” is a kind of look-ahead notice effect. That is, the accessory continuous notice effect is an effect suggesting the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the predetermined start information.
In the following description, it is assumed that the start information that is the target of the accessory continuous notice effect is “the accessory continuous notice target start information”.
In the present embodiment, the accessory continuous notice effect is an effect that suggests a result of the prior special figure stop symbol determination based on the start information of the object consecutive notice target (specifically, the possibility of being a “hit symbol”). ing.
It should be noted that the feature continuous notice effect may indicate a result of the prior special figure fluctuation pattern determination based on the starting information on the subject continuous notice target (specifically, the possibility of “super reach fluctuation”). .

On the set plate of the pachinko machine 1, a movable body for production (not shown) is disposed. The movable body can operate in a predetermined manner. The movable body is provided with a movable body lamp (not shown). The movable body lamp includes a light emitting element (LED).
In the present embodiment, the first operation mode, the second operation mode, the third operation mode, and the fourth operation mode are defined as the operation modes of the movable body. The first to fourth operation modes are different from each other.
In the accessory continuous notice effect, a movable object effect is executed a plurality of times. In each movable body effect, the movable body operates in any one of the first operation mode to the fourth operation mode.
In the accessory continuous notice effect, the result of the prior determination based on the object continuous notice target start information (specifically, the big hit expectation degree) is determined according to the content of the last movable object effect (the operation mode of the movable object). It is suggested.

Here, the expectation degree of jackpot of each operation mode of the movable body is “fourth operation mode”, “third operation mode”, “second operation mode”, “first operation mode” in descending order of the jackpot expectation level. "(Expectation for big hit → Low expectation for big hit)".
That is, each operation mode is staged (ranked) in advance based on the jackpot expectation. At this time, the stages (orders) of the respective operation modes are “fourth operation mode” (fourth stage), “third operation mode” (third stage), and “second stage” in order from the highest level (rank). It is defined to be “operation mode” (second stage) and “first operation mode” (first stage) (step high → step low).

When an accessory continuous notice effect is executed, a plurality of movable body effect triggers and a movable body effect content corresponding to each movable object effect trigger are set. Then, in the accessory continuous notice effect, the movable body and the movable body lamp are driven in accordance with the contents of the movable body presentation corresponding to the movable body presentation opportunity in accordance with the arrival of the movable body presentation opportunity each time. Executed.
The “movable body production opportunity” is an opportunity for executing the accessory production. The “movable body effect content” is information (information specifying the content of the movable body effect) that specifies the operation mode of the movable body.
In the present embodiment, as a movable body effect opportunity, a start time of a variable effect corresponding to each advance reservation information, a start time of a variable effect corresponding to the accessory continuous notice target start information, and the like are defined. And, when the accessory continuous notice effect is executed, as a movable body effect opportunity, at the start of the variable effect corresponding to each preceding hold information, and at the start of the variable effect corresponding to the accessory continuous notice target start information, Is set.
In this embodiment, the accessory continuous notice effect is executed only for the special figure 2 start information among the special figure 1 start information and the special figure 2 start information.

Next, the fluctuating effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the first variation effect and the second variation effect are continuously executed as the variation effects while the special symbol variation display is being performed.
In the present embodiment, modes corresponding to various types of variation modes (variation mode numbers) are defined as the first variation rendering mode (variation rendering number). In addition, as modes of the second variation effect (variation effect numbers), modes corresponding to various types of variation patterns (each variation pattern number) are defined.
In the following description, the first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a1 is “left symbol”, and the first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a2 is “middle symbol”. The first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a3 is referred to as a “right symbol”.

First, the aspect of the first variation effect corresponding to each variation mode will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, when “pseudo continuous variation” (“pseudo continuous 2 variation”, “pseudo continuous 3 variation” or “pseudo continuous 4 variation”) is selected (designated) as the type of variation mode, the first variation A “pseudo continuous variation effect” is selected as the effect.
In the present embodiment, as a pseudo continuous variation effect mode (variation effect number), “pseudo continuous 2 variation effect” corresponding to “pseudo continuous 2 variation” and “pseudo continuous 3 variation” corresponding to “pseudo continuous 3 variation”. An “effect” and a “pseudo-continuous 4 variation effect” corresponding to “pseudo-continuous 4 variation” are defined.
The “pseudo continuous variation effect” is an effect in which the variable display of the first effect symbol z1 is executed a plurality of times in a pseudo manner during the execution of one special symbol variation display. Specifically, the pseudo continuous variation effect includes a plurality of pseudo variation effects.
In the present embodiment, the “pseudo-continuous two-change effect” is configured to include two pseudo-change effects. On the other hand, the “pseudo-continuous three-variation effect” is configured to include three pseudo-variation effects. On the other hand, the “pseudo-continuous four-change effect” is configured to include four pseudo-change effects.
In the following description, among the pseudo variation effects included in the pseudo continuous variation effect, the last pseudo variation effect is referred to as a “last pseudo variation effect”. In addition, among the pseudo variation effects included in the pseudo continuous variation effect, each time pseudo variation effect excluding the last round pseudo variation effect is referred to as “halfway pseudo variation effect”.

Each of the pseudo-variation effects (half-time pseudo-variation effect and final pseudo-variation effect) includes a normal variation effect, a normal reach variation effect, and a pseudo-continuous effect.
“Normal variation effect” refers to a display effect in which the first effect symbol z1 is normally varied and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. Specifically, in the normal variation effect, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are normally displayed in a variable manner.
“Normal variation display” refers to a display in which the types of the first effect symbols z1 displayed at the lottery result display positions in the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 are sequentially switched.
The “lottery result display position” refers to a position where the first effect symbol z1 is stopped and displayed in a stop effect to be described later.
In the “normal reach fluctuation effect”, the first effect symbol z1 is temporarily stopped and displayed in two or more areas among the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and is temporarily stopped and displayed in two or more areas. A combination of the first effect symbols z1 is a display effect that is a combination included in the “big hit symbol”.
In the following description, in the normal reach fluctuation effect (or reduced reach fluctuation effect described later), the first effect symbol z1 that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination included in the “big hit symbol” is referred to as “the first state that forms the reach state”. It is referred to as “design z1”.
Specifically, in the normal reach variation effect, the reach state is formed by the left symbol and the right symbol. That is, in the normal reach variation effect, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the left symbol and the right symbol that are temporarily stopped are of the same type. In the normal reach variation effect, the middle symbols are normally displayed in a variable manner.
“Temporary stop display” is a state in which one type of first effect symbol z1 is moved (swinged, rotated, etc.) in a predetermined manner at the lottery result display positions in the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. A display that continues for a predetermined time.

The “pseudo-continuous effect” is an effect that inquires whether or not the next pseudo-variable effect is executed.
The “pseudo-continuous effect” is a type of pseudo-continuous effect that indicates (implies) whether or not the next pseudo-variable effect is to be executed depending on whether or not the pseudo-continuous continuation symbol is temporarily displayed.
The “pseudo continuous continuation symbol” is configured to include information (in this embodiment, “NEXT” characters) that ensues execution of the next pseudo variation effect.
In the present embodiment, “pseudo continuous effect” and “pseudo continuous end effect” are defined as “pseudo continuous effect”.
The “pseudo continuous effect” is an effect that suggests that the next pseudo-variable effect will be executed after asking whether or not the next pseudo-variable effect is executed.
Specifically, in the “pseudo continuous continuation effect”, a pseudo continuous continuation symbol (middle symbol) appears as a middle symbol, and the pseudo continuous continuation symbol moves toward the lottery result display position. At this time, the moving speed of the pseudo continuous continuation symbol is slower than the moving speed of the first effect symbol z1 in the normal variation display. In the “pseudo continuous continuation effect”, the pseudo continuous continuation symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. This suggests that the next pseudo-variation effect will be executed.
The “pseudo-continuous effect” is an effect that suggests that the next pseudo-variable effect is not executed after asking whether or not the next pseudo-variable effect is executed.
Specifically, in the “pseudo continuous end effect”, a pseudo continuous continuation symbol (middle symbol) appears as a middle symbol as in the pseudo continuous continuation effect, and the pseudo continuous continuation symbol is directed toward the lottery result display position. Move. At this time, the moving speed of the pseudo continuous continuation symbol is slower than the moving speed of the first effect symbol z1 in the normal variation display. In the “pseudo continuous end effect”, the pseudo continuous continuation symbol passes through the lottery result display position without being temporarily stopped. This suggests that the next pseudo fluctuation effect is not executed.

Specifically, in each half-time pseudo variation effect, the reach variation effect is executed after the normal variation effect is executed in response to the start. That is, after the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are normally displayed in a variable manner, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a reach state is formed by the right symbol and the left symbol. Then, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed while the reach variation effect is being executed (when the reach state is being formed).
Each halfway pseudo-variable effect is ended in response to the end of the pseudo-continuous effect. Then, in response to the end of the midway pseudo variation effect, the next pseudo variation effect is started.
In each final pseudo variation effect, the reach variation effect is executed after the normal variation effect is executed. That is, after the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are normally displayed in a variable manner, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a reach state is formed by the right symbol and the left symbol. Then, the pseudo-continuous end effect is executed while the reach fluctuation effect is being executed (when the reach state is being formed).
The final pseudo variation effect of each time is ended in accordance with the end of the pseudo-continuous effect. Then, the second variation effect (normal reach variation effect or super reach variation effect) is started in response to the end of the final pseudo variation effect.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, when “variation without pseudo-continuous” is selected (designated) as the type of variation mode, “various rendering without pseudo-continuous” is selected as the variation effect.
In the present embodiment, modes corresponding to various types (variation pattern numbers) of “pseudo-continuous variation” are defined as modes (variable rendering number) of “pseudo-continuous variation rendering”.
The “pseudo-continuous variation effect” includes a normal variation effect.
Specifically, in the “pseudo-continuous variation effect”, the “normal variation effect” is started in response to the start. That is, the normal variation display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is started.
Then, in the “pseudo continuous variation effect”, the normal variation display (“normal variation effect”) of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is continued until the end of the “pseudo continuous variation effect”.
It should be noted that the pseudo variation effect (normal pseudo variation effect or special pseudo variation effect) is not executed in the pseudo continuous variation effect.

Next, the aspect of the second variation effect corresponding to each variation pattern will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, when “super reach variation” is selected (designated) as the type of variation pattern, “super reach variation effect” is selected as the second variation effect.
In the present embodiment, modes corresponding to various types of “super reach variation” (variation pattern numbers) are defined as “super reach variation effect” modes (variation effect numbers).
Specifically, as a mode of “super reach fluctuation production”, “super reach fluctuation production 1” corresponding to “super reach fluctuation 1” and “super reach fluctuation production 2” corresponding to “super reach fluctuation 2” , “Super reach variation production 3” corresponding to “Super reach variation 3”, “Super reach variation production 4” corresponding to “Super reach variation 4”, and “Super reach variation 5” corresponding to “Super reach variation 5” Production 5 ”is defined.
As a result, the expectation level of each aspect of the “super reach variation effect” is “super reach variation effect 5”, “super reach change effect 4”, “super reach change effect 3”, “ “Super reach fluctuation production 2” and “Super reach fluctuation production 1” (high expectation → low expectation).

“Super reach variation effect” (“super reach variation effect 1” to “super reach change effect 5”) includes a reach change effect, a reduced reach change effect, and an extended reach effect as display effects. ing.
The “reduction reach variation effect” refers to a display effect in which the first effect symbol z1 forming the reach state is reduced and displayed (temporary stop display). In particular, in the reduced reach variation effect, only the first effect symbol z1 that forms the reach state is displayed, and the display of the first effect symbol z1 that does not form the reach state is omitted. Specifically, in the reduced reach variation display, the right symbol and the left symbol forming the reach state are temporarily stopped in a reduced state, and the middle symbol is not displayed.

The “development reach effect” is an effect encouraging that the “hit symbol” is stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4. The development reach production is executed during the reach variation production.
In the present embodiment, “Development Reach Production 1” to “Development Reach Production 5” having different contents are defined as types of development reach production.
Then, in “super reach fluctuation production 1”, “development reach production 1” is executed as the development reach production. “Development reach effect 1” includes the display of “Development reach effect image 1” on the display screen 31a. “Development reach effect image 1” is an effect image by “character A”.
On the other hand, in the “super reach fluctuation production 2”, “development reach production 2” is executed as the development reach production. “Development reach effect 2” includes the display of “development reach effect image 2” on the display screen 31a. “Development reach effect image 2” is an effect image by “character B”.
On the other hand, in the “super reach variation effect 3”, the “advance reach effect 3” is executed as the advance reach effect. “Development reach effect 3” includes display of “Development reach effect image 3” on the display screen 31a. “Development reach effect image 3” is an effect image by “character C”.
On the other hand, in the “super reach fluctuation effect 4”, the “advance reach effect 4” is executed as the advance reach effect. “Development reach effect 4” includes a display of “development reach effect image 4” on the display screen 31a. “Development reach effect image 4” is an effect image by “character D”.
On the other hand, in the “super reach fluctuation effect 5”, the “advance reach effect 5” is executed as the advance reach effect. “Development reach effect 5” includes a display of “development reach effect image 5” on the display screen 31a. “Development reach effect image 5” is an effect image by “character E”.

Specifically, in “super reach variation effect 1” to “super reach variation effect 5”, the reduced reach variation effect is executed after the normal reach variation effect is executed.
That is, from the state in which the left symbol and the right symbol form the reach state, the left symbol and the right symbol that form the reach state are reduced, and the reduced left symbol is moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 31a to reduce the size. The displayed right symbol is moved to the upper right end of the display screen 31a, and the display of the middle symbol disappears. At this time, a reach state is formed by the left symbol and the right symbol that are stopped and displayed in the stop effect related to the predetermined stop effect number.
In the “super reach fluctuation effect 1” to “super reach fluctuation effect 5”, during the period when the reduced reach fluctuation effect is being executed, the “development reach effect” (“development reach effect 1” to “development reach effect 5”. )) Is executed.
That is, the “development reach effect” is started in response to the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the reduced reach fluctuation effect. The “development reach production” is ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start.
“Super-reach fluctuation effect 1” to “super-reach fluctuation effect 5” are ended in accordance with the end of “development reach effect”. Then, the stop effect is started in response to the end of “super reach change effect 1” to “super reach change effect 5”.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, when “normal reach variation” is selected (designated) as the type of variation pattern, “normal reach variation effect” is selected as the second variation effect.
In the present embodiment, modes corresponding to various types of “normal reach variation” (variation pattern numbers) are defined as modes (variation effect numbers) of “normal reach variation effects”.
The “normal reach fluctuation effect” includes a normal reach fluctuation effect.
Specifically, in the “normal reach variation effect”, the normal reach variation effect is executed in response to the start. That is, the left symbol and the right symbol form a reach state. The normal reach variation effect is ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start thereof.
The “normal reach variation effect” is terminated in response to the end of the normal reach variation effect. Then, the stop effect is started in response to the end of the “normal reach fluctuation effect”.
In the normal reach variation production, the development reach production is not executed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, when “variation without reach” is selected (designated) as the type of variation pattern, “variation effect without reach” is selected as the second variation effect.
In the present embodiment, modes corresponding to various types (variation pattern numbers) of “variation without reach” are defined as modes (variation rendering number) of “reaching variation without reach”.
The “unreachable variation effect” is configured to include a normal variation effect as a display effect.
Specifically, in the “reaching variation effect without reach”, the “normal variation effect” is executed in response to the start. That is, the normal variation display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is started.
In the “reaching variation effect without reach”, the normal variation display (“normal variation effect”) of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is continued until the end of the “reach variation variation effect”. Then, the stop effect is started in response to the end of the “non-reach fluctuation effect”.
Note that the reach variation effect and the development reach effect are not executed in the reachless change effect.

Next, the main notice effect performed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the main notice effect is executed while the change effect is being executed.
The “main notice effect” is an effect executed during the variation effect, and suggests the result of the start determination (special figure winning determination, special figure stop symbol determination, special diagram variation pattern determination, etc.) related to the variable effect. It has become a directing.
In the present embodiment, the main notice effect is executed during the first variation effect. Then, the main notice effect suggests the result of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination (specifically, the possibility that the type of the fluctuation pattern is “super reach fluctuation” (hereinafter referred to as “reach expectation”)).
In the present embodiment, telop notice, cut-in notice, and button notice are defined as types of main notice effects.

“Telop notice” is a type of main notice effect that suggests the degree of reach expectation according to the effect form (the contents of a telop notice image described later).
Specifically, the telop notice includes the display of the telop notice image on the display screen 31a. The telop preview image is an effect image with the content “A telop displaying a predetermined comment appears”. In the telop notice image, the reach expectation level is suggested by a combination of the content of the comment displayed in the appearing telop and the background color.
In the present embodiment, “comment A”, “comment B”, and “comment C” are defined as the contents of the comment displayed on the telop preview image. Further, “blue background”, “green background”, “purple background”, and “red background” are defined as background modes displayed in the telop notice image.
Here, the reach expectation level of each comment displayed on the telop preview image is “Comment C”, “Comment B”, “Comment A” (high reach expectation level → reach) in descending order of reach expectation level. (Expectation is low).
In addition, the reach expectation level of each aspect of the background displayed in the telop notice image is “red background”, “purple background”, “green background”, “blue background” (reach expectation) in descending order of reach expectation. (High → High reach expectation).

In this embodiment, “telop notice A”, “telop notice B”, and “telop notice C” are defined as the types of telop notice.
The reach expectations for each type of telop notice are “telop notice C”, “telop notice B”, “telop notice A” (high reach expectation → reach expectation low) in descending order of reach expectation. It is stipulated that
In addition, “telop notice A1” to “telop notice A4” are defined as modes of “telop notice A”.
The reach expectation level of each aspect of “telop notice A” is “telop notice A4”, “telop notice A3”, “telop notice A2”, and “telop notice A1” (reach) in descending order of reach expectation. High expectations → low reach expectations).
Further, “telop notice B1” to “telop notice B4” are defined as modes of “telop notice B”.
The reach expectation level of each aspect of “telop notice B” is “telop notice B4”, “telop notice B3”, “telop notice B2”, “telop notice B1” (reach) in descending order of reach expectation. High expectations → low reach expectations).
Furthermore, “telop notice C1” to “telop notice C4” are defined as modes of “telop notice C”.
The reach expectation of each aspect of the “telop notice C” is “telop notice C4”, “telop notice C3”, “telop notice C2”, “telop notice C1” (reach) in descending order of reach expectation. High expectations → low reach expectations).

In the telop notice image corresponding to “telop notice A1” (“telop notice A1” to “telop notice A4”), “comment A” is displayed as the content of the comment.
In the telop notice image corresponding to “telop notice B” (“telop notice B1” to “telop notice B4”), “comment B” is displayed as the content of the comment.
In the telop notice image corresponding to “telop notice C” (“telop notice C1” to “telop notice C4”), “comment C” is displayed as the content of the comment.
Further, in the telop notice image corresponding to “telop notice A1”, “telop notice B1”, and “telop notice C1”, “blue background” is displayed as a background mode.
In the telop notice image corresponding to “telop notice A2”, “telop notice B2”, and “telop notice C2”, “green background” is displayed as the background mode.
In the telop notice image corresponding to “telop notice A3”, “telop notice B3”, and “telop notice C3”, “purple background” is displayed as the background mode.
In the telop notice image corresponding to “telop notice A4”, “telop notice B4”, and “telop notice C4”, “red background” is displayed as the background mode.

  The telop notice is started when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect. In the telop notice, display of the telop notice image on the display screen 31a is started in response to the start. Then, in the telop notice, the display of the notice image on the display screen 31a is terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start. Thereby, the telop notice is ended.

“Cut-in notice” is a type of main notice effect that suggests the degree of reach expectation according to the effect mode (the contents of a cut-in notice image described later).
Specifically, the cut-in notice includes a display of a cut-in notice image on the display screen 31a. The cut-in preview image is an effect image with the content “the screen is torn and a predetermined character appears”. In the cut-in preview image, the reach expectation level is suggested by the combination of the type of character that has appeared and the background color.
In this embodiment, “Character A”, “Character B”, and “Character C” are defined as the types of characters displayed in the cut-in preview image. Further, “blue background”, “green background”, “purple background”, and “red background” are defined as background modes displayed in the cut-in notice image.
Here, the reach expectation of each type of character displayed in the cut-in preview image is “character C”, “character B”, “character A” (high reach expectation → Reach expectation is low).
In addition, the reach expectation of each aspect of the background displayed in the cut-in notice image is “red background”, “purple background”, “green background”, “blue background” (reach) in descending order of reach expectation. High expectations → low reach expectations).

In this embodiment, “cut-in notice A”, “cut-in notice B”, and “cut-in notice C” are defined as types of cut-in notice.
The reach expectations for each type of cut-in notice are “cut-in notice C”, “cut-in notice B”, “cut-in notice A” (reach expectation high → reach in descending order of reach expectation). (Expectation is low).
In addition, “cut-in notice A1” to “cut-in notice A4” are defined as modes of “cut-in notice A”.
The reach expectation level of each aspect of “cut-in notice A” is “cut-in notice A4”, “cut-in notice A3”, “cut-in notice A2”, “cut-in notice” in descending order of reach expectation. Preliminary notice A1 "(reach expectation high → reach expectation low).
Further, “cut-in notice B1” to “cut-in notice B4” are defined as modes of “cut-in notice B”.
The reach expectation level of each aspect of “cut-in notice B” is “cut-in notice B4”, “cut-in notice B3”, “cut-in notice B2”, “cut-in notice” in descending order of reach expectation. Preliminary notice B1 ”(high reach expectation level → reach expectation level low).
Further, “cut-in notice C1” to “cut-in notice C4” are defined as modes of “cut-in notice C”.
The reach expectation level of each aspect of “cut-in notice C” is “cut-in notice C4”, “cut-in notice C3”, “cut-in notice C2”, “cut-in notice” in descending order of reach expectation. It is defined to be “notice C1” (high reach expectation → low reach expectation).

In the cut-in notice image corresponding to “cut-in notice A” (“cut-in notice A1” to “cut-in notice A4”), “character A” is displayed as a character.
In the cut-in notice image corresponding to “cut-in notice B” (“cut-in notice B1” to “cut-in notice B4”), “character B” is displayed as a character.
In the cut-in notice image corresponding to “cut-in notice C” (“cut-in notice C1” to “cut-in notice C4”), “character C” is displayed as a character.
In the cut-in notice image corresponding to “cut-in notice A1”, “cut-in notice B1”, and “cut-in notice C1”, “blue background” is displayed as a background mode.
In the cut-in notice image corresponding to “cut-in notice A2”, “cut-in notice B2”, and “cut-in notice C2”, “green background” is displayed as the background mode.
In a cut-in notice image corresponding to “cut-in notice A3”, “cut-in notice B3”, and “cut-in notice C3”, “purple background” is displayed as a background mode.
In the cut-in notice image corresponding to “cut-in notice A4”, “cut-in notice B4”, and “cut-in notice C4”, “red background” is displayed as a background mode.

  The cut-in notice is started when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect. In the cut-in notice, display of the cut-in notice image on the display screen 31a is started in response to the start. Then, in the cut-in notice, the display of the notice image on the display screen 31a is terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start. This terminates the cut-in notice.

“Button notice” is a type of main notice effect that suggests the degree of reach expectation according to the effect form (the contents of a button notice image described later).
In the button notice, the operation valid state is set (started) in response to the start, and the display of the button operation prompt image on the display screen 31a is started.
The operation valid state is canceled (terminated) in response to the establishment of one of the conditions that the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is detected and that a predetermined operation valid time has elapsed from the start (setting). .
In the button preview, the display of the button operation prompt image is terminated and the display of the button preview image is started on the display screen 31a in response to the cancellation of the operation valid state.
The button operation prompt image is an image that prompts the user to press the effect button 5b. Specifically, the button operation prompt image includes a figure imitating the effect button 5b, information that prompts the user to press the effect button 5b (in this embodiment, “PUSH”), and the operation enabled state is released. Information indicating the remaining time until (in this embodiment, a time bar indicating the remaining time).
The button preview image is an effect image with the content “a predetermined icon pops out from the figure imitating the effect button 5b”. In the button preview image, the reach expectation level is suggested by the form of the icon popped out.
In the present embodiment, “blue icon”, “green icon”, “purple icon”, and “red icon” are defined as icon modes displayed on the button preview image.
Here, the reach expectation level of each icon displayed in the button preview image is “red icon”, “purple icon”, “green icon”, “blue icon” (reach) in descending order of reach expectation level. High expectations → low reach expectations).

In this embodiment, “button notice 1” to “button notice 4” are defined as button notice modes.
The reach expectation level of each mode of the button notice is “button notice 4”, “button notice 3”, “button notice 2”, “button notice 1” (high reach expectation level) in descending order of reach expectation. → Reach expectation is low).
In the button notice image corresponding to “button notice 1”, a “blue icon” is displayed. In the button notice image corresponding to “button notice 2”, a “green icon” is displayed. In the button notice image corresponding to “button notice 3”, a “purple icon” is displayed. In the button notice image corresponding to “button notice 4”, a “red icon” is displayed.
The button notice is started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect. In the button notice, an operation valid state is set in response to the start, and display of the button operation prompt image on the display screen 31a is started. Further, in the button notice, the button operation is performed on the display screen 31a according to the establishment of one of the conditions that the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is detected and the predetermined operation effective time has passed since the start. The display of the prompt image is terminated, and the display of the button notice image is started. Then, the display of the button operation prompt image is terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start. Thereby, the button notice is ended.

Next, a sub-notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the sub-notice effect is executed while the change effect is being executed.
The “sub-notice effect” is an effect executed during the variation effect, and suggests the result of the start determination (special figure winning determination, special figure stop symbol determination, special diagram variation pattern determination, etc.) related to the variable effect. It has become a directing.
In the present embodiment, the sub-notice effect suggests a big hit expectation.
In the present embodiment, the background effect notice and the mini character notice are defined as the types of the sub notice effect.

“Background effect notice” is a type of sub-notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot depending on the effect mode (the contents of an effect notice image described later).
More specifically, the background effect notice includes the display of the effect notice image on the display screen 31a.
The effect preview image is an effect image that is displayed overlaid on the background image. In the effect preview image, the expectation degree of jackpot is suggested by the content.
In this embodiment, “background effect notice 1” to “background effect notice 4” are defined as background effect notice modes (types).
The jackpot expectation of each aspect of the background effect notice is “background effect notice 4”, “background effect notice 3”, “background effect notice 2”, “background effect notice 1” (Expectation high → big hit expectation low)
As the effect preview image, “an image showing a state where a predetermined object is dancing in the wind” is displayed. In “background effect notice 1” to “background effect notice 5”, the “number of objects dancing in the wind” in the effect notice image is different from each other.

  The background effect notice is started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect. In the background effect notice, display of the effect notice image on the display screen 31a is started in response to the start. Then, in the background effect notice, the display of the effect notice image on the display screen 31a is terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start. Thereby, the background effect notice is ended.

The “mini-character notice” is a type of sub-notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot depending on the effect mode (the contents of a mini-character notice image described later).
Specifically, the mini character notice includes the display of the mini character notice image on the display screen 31a.
The mini character preview image is an effect image with the content “a predetermined mini character appears”. In the mini character preview image, the big hit expectation is suggested depending on the type of mini character that appears.
In this embodiment, “mini-character notice 1” to “mini-character notice 5” are defined as the mini-character notice modes.
The jackpot expectations for each aspect of the "mini character notice" are "mini character notice 5", "mini character notice 4", "mini character notice 3", "mini character notice 2", "mini character notice 1""(Expectation for big hit → Low expectation for big hit)".
In “mini character notice 1” to “mini character notice 5”, the types of mini characters appearing in the mini character notice image are different from each other.

  The mini character notice is started when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect. In the mini character notice, the display of the mini character notice image on the display screen 31a is started in response to the start. Then, in the mini character notice, the display of the mini character notice image on the display screen 31a is terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start. Thus, the mini character notice is terminated.

(Selection method of notice effect in pachinko machine 1)
Next, a method for selecting a notice effect mode in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, after the big hit gaming state, a gaming state advantageous to the player (in this embodiment, a state in which the time reduction control is being executed) is generated. A special lottery period is set during the occurrence of a gaming state advantageous to the player.
And when the specific result is determined by the game determination (preliminary determination or start determination) executed during the special lottery period, the result of the game determination is suggested as compared with the case where other results are determined. A specific aspect is easily selected as the aspect of the notice effect to be performed (in this embodiment, the pre-read notice effect or the main notice effect).
Specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, when a special lottery condition to be described later is satisfied, a game determination (preliminary determination or start determination) result based on predetermined start information (hereinafter referred to as “special lottery target start information”) is used. As the lottery process for selecting the suggested notice effect (prefetch notice effect or main notice effect), a special lottery process is executed instead of the normal lottery process.
In the special lottery process, the probability that a specific mode is selected as the mode of the notice effect that suggests the result of the game determination based on the special lottery target start information is higher than that in the normal lottery process.
In the present embodiment, in the special lottery process, compared with the normal lottery process, as a mode of the notice effect that suggests the result of the game determination based on the special lottery target start information, among the types of the notice effect, the jackpot expectation degree The probability that the mode with the highest (or reach expectation) is selected is increased.
The “special lottery condition” is a condition for executing the special lottery process.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, when the time reduction control is started, the special lottery period and the special lottery target effect are selected and set.
The “special lottery period” is information for designating a period for executing the special lottery process. In the present embodiment, the first half period and the second half period are defined as the special lottery period.
The “first half period” is a period from the start of the time reduction control to the end of the 50th special symbol stop display during the time reduction control.
The “second half period” is a period from the end of the 50th special symbol stop display during the short-time control to the end of the short-time control.
The “special lottery effect” is information that specifies the type of the notice effect that is the subject of the special lottery process. In the present embodiment, “holding notice effect”, “actual continuous notice effect”, and “main notice effect” are defined as special lottery effect.
In the present embodiment, at the end of the big hit gaming state (at the start of short-time control), as the special lottery period, one of the first half period and the second half period is selected and set, and as the special lottery target effect, One effect (type) is selected and set from among the holding notice effect, the accessory continuous notice effect, and the main notice effect.
Then, at the time of executing the game determination (preliminary determination or start determination), it is determined whether or not a special lottery condition is satisfied.
At this time, (1) it is during a special lottery period that is set in advance, and (2) a specific type (in the present embodiment, “super” in accordance with the game determination (preliminary determination or start determination) And (3) a special lottery target effect set in advance as a notice effect (in this embodiment, a pre-read notice effect or a main notice effect) that suggests the result of the game determination. Is determined to satisfy the special lottery condition.
On the other hand, if at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, it is determined that the special lottery condition is not satisfied.
When it is determined that the special lottery condition is satisfied, the special lottery process is executed instead of the normal lottery process as a lottery process for selecting a notice effect mode that suggests the result of the game determination. The
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, “super reach variation” is determined as the variation pattern type by the game determination (preliminary determination or start determination) executed during the special lottery period (first half period or second half period), and When the special lottery target effect is selected as the type of the notice effect that suggests the result of the game determination, as a form of the notice effect that suggests the result of the game determination, the big hit expectation The mode with the highest degree (or reach expectation) is easily selected.
In this embodiment, in this case, as the mode of the notice effect that suggests the result of the game determination, the mode having the highest jackpot expectation (or reach expectation) among the aspects of the notice effect is always selected. The
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, during the occurrence of a gaming state advantageous to the player (in the present embodiment, the state in which the time reduction control is being executed), a type with a high expectation degree of jackpot as the type of variation pattern (this embodiment) Then, when “super-reach fluctuation” is selected, it is easy to select an aspect with a high jackpot expectation (or reach expectation) as the notice effect.
Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a mode with a high expectation level is not selected as a mode of a notice effect, even though a type with a high jackpot expectation level is selected as the type of variation pattern. .

(Processing executed by the effect control circuit 300)
Next, processing executed by the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 will be described.
First, the CPU initialization process executed by the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 will be described.
The effect control circuit 300 is provided with a reset circuit (not shown). The reset circuit generates a reset signal when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 starts a CPU initialization process (not shown) in response to the generation of a reset signal by the reset circuit.
When the CPU initialization process is started, first, various registers, various timers (frame timer, phase timer, etc.), clock pulse oscillator, various RAMs, etc. are initialized. Next, effect random number update processing for updating various effect random numbers is executed. Thereafter, the effect random number update process is repeatedly executed until various interrupt processes described later are executed.

Next, command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 will be described.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 executes a command reception interrupt process (not shown) in response to receiving a control command from the main control circuit 200.
In the command reception interrupt process, the control command received from the main control circuit 200 is stored (stored) in the reception buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

Next, sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the sub-timer interrupt process.
The effect control circuit 300 includes a clock pulse generation circuit. The clock pulse generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal every predetermined period.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 starts the sub-timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 38 at predetermined intervals based on the generation of clock pulses by the clock pulse generation circuit. When the sub timer interrupt process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S31-1.
In step S31-1, a register saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-2. In the register saving process, the register value is saved in the saving area of the RAM.
In step S31-2, timer update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-3. In the timer update process, various timers provided in the effect control circuit 300 are updated.
In step S31-3, command analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-4. In the command analysis process, a control command stored in the reception buffer of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is analyzed, and a process corresponding to the received control command is executed. The command analysis process will be described later.

In step S31-4, a time schedule management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-5. In the time schedule management process, the progress of each performance is managed.
Here, the ROM of the effect control circuit 300 corresponds to each effect (each aspect of the change effect, each aspect of the stop effect, each aspect of the notice effect, each aspect of the pre-reading notice effect, each aspect of the hold effect, etc.). An effect control table is stored.
The “effect control table” is information that defines the progress of the effects (display effects, sound effects, lamp effects, movable object effects, etc.).
In each effect control table, a plurality of process data are registered in time series. Each process data includes one or a plurality of command information. Each command information is a process of designating the start of a predetermined effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect or movable object effect). In particular, each command information includes information for specifying the contents of the effect to be started (display effect number, sound effect number, lamp effect number, or movable object effect number).
In the time schedule management process, an effect control table corresponding to each effect set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 and an effect management timer corresponding to the effect (the effect management timer for measuring the elapsed time of the effect) ) To manage the progress of the production.
Specifically, for each effect, a process based on the process data corresponding to the current value of the effect management timer among the process data registered in the effect control table is executed. Thereby, the command information included in the process data is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

  In step S31-5, a register restoration process is executed, and the sub timer interrupt process is terminated. In the register restoration process, the register value saved in step S31-1 is restored.

Next, the command analysis process in step S31-3 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing.
When the command analysis process is executed in step S31-3, the process proceeds to step S32-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S32-1, a set value command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-2.
In the set value command reception process, it is determined whether or not a subcommand specifying a set value has been received. If it is determined that the subcommand specifying the setting value is received, the setting value specified by the subcommand is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

In step S32-2, a game state command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-3.
In the gaming state command reception process, it is determined whether or not a gaming state designation command has been received. And when it determines with having received the game state designation | designated command, the setting of various effect flags is performed.
Specifically, when the gaming state offset value designated by the gaming state designation command is a value corresponding to the suspension of the time reduction control, “0” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Set. On the other hand, when the gaming state offset value designated by the gaming state designation command is a value corresponding to the execution of the time reduction control, “1” is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. .
Further, when the gaming state offset value designated by the gaming state designation command is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the special figure low probability state, the special figure high probability rate state flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 Set “0” to. On the other hand, when the gaming state offset value designated by the gaming state designation command is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the special figure high probability state, the special figure high probability ratio state flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 Set “1” to.

In step S32-3, a hold command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-4. The hold command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-4, prefetch command reception processing is executed, and the flow proceeds to step S32-5. The prefetch command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-5, a variable command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-6. The variable command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-6, stop command reception processing is executed, and the flow proceeds to step S32-7. The stop command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-7, an opening command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-8. The opening command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-8, an ending command reception process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4). The ending command reception process will be described later.

Next, the hold command reception process in step S32-3 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the hold command reception process.
When the hold command reception process is executed in step S32-3, the process proceeds to step S36-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not a hold number designation command has been received. If it is determined that a hold number designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-2, and the hold number designation command is changed. If it is determined that it has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In step S36-2, it is determined whether or not the hold number designation command designates an increase in the hold number (that the hold number has increased by “1”), and the hold number designation command designates an increase in the hold number. If it is determined that there is (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-3, and the hold number designation command does not designate an increase in the hold number (designates that the hold number has decreased by “1”). When it determines (No), it transfers to step S36-4.

In step S36-3, the number-of-holds addition process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the hold number addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the hold number designation command specifies an increase in the special figure 1 hold number.
If it is determined that the hold number designation command specifies an increase in the special figure 1 hold number, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter is newly set. Special figure 1 Set to the number of hold counter. In addition, a normal hold effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special figure 1 start information is set.
For this, the effect control table corresponding to the normal hold effect is read, and the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved symbol h, a storage unit (first storage unit) in which newly acquired special figure 1 start information is stored among the four display positions included in the reserved symbol display region b2. Display position corresponding to .about.fourth storage unit) is set. Here, the memory | storage part (1st memory | storage part-4th memory | storage part) in which the newly acquired special figure 1 starting information is memorize | stored is determined based on the value of a special figure 1 hold | maintenance number counter.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the hold number designation command specifies an increase in the special figure 2 hold number, a value obtained by adding “1” to the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter is newly set. Special figure 2 Set to the number of hold counter. In addition, a normal hold effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special figure 2 start information is set.
For this, the effect control table corresponding to the normal hold effect is read, and the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved symbol h, a storage unit (first storage unit) in which newly acquired special figure 2 start information is stored among the four display positions included in the reserved symbol display region b3. Display position corresponding to .about.fourth storage unit) is set. Here, the memory | storage part (1st memory | storage part-4th memory | storage part) in which the newly acquired special figure 2 starting information is memorize | stored is determined based on the value of a special figure 2 reservation number counter.

In step S36-4, the number-of-holds subtraction process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the hold number subtraction process, first, it is determined whether or not the hold number designation command specifies subtraction of the special figure 1 hold number.
If it is determined that the special figure 1 hold number subtraction is specified by the hold number designation command, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter is newly set. Special figure 1 Set to the number of hold counter. Further, the display position of each reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b2 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the holding effect corresponding to the holding symbol h displayed in the holding symbol display area b1 is terminated. Thereby, the display of the hold symbol h corresponding to the ended hold effect is ended.
Further, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is set to the reserved symbol display area b2 (in the first storage unit). The corresponding display position is changed (shifted) to the reserved symbol display area b1.
In addition, when the hold symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the second storage unit in the hold symbol display area b2, the display position of the hold symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the second storage unit to the second display unit b2. Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to one storage unit.
Further, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the third storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the third storage unit to the second display unit b2. 2 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.
In addition, when the holding symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit in the holding symbol display area b2, the display position of the holding symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit to the second display unit b2. 2 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the hold number designation command specifies subtraction of the special figure 2 hold number, a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter is newly set. Special figure 2 Set to the number-of-holds counter. In addition, the display position of each reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b3 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the holding effect corresponding to the holding symbol h displayed in the holding symbol display area b1 is terminated. Thereby, the display of the hold symbol h corresponding to the ended hold effect is ended.
In addition, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the first storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is set to the reserved symbol display area b3 (in the first storage unit). The corresponding display position is changed (shifted) to the reserved symbol display area b1.
In addition, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the second storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the second storage unit to the second display unit b3. Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to one storage unit.
In addition, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the third storage unit in the reserved symbol display area b3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the third storage unit to the second display unit b3. 2 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.
In addition, when the holding symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit in the holding symbol display area b3, the display position of the holding symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the fourth storage unit to the second display unit b3. 2 Change (shift) to the display position corresponding to the storage unit.

Next, the prefetch command reception process in step S32-4 will be described.
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing prefetch command reception processing.
When the prefetch command receiving process is executed in step S32-4, the process proceeds to step S33-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether a prefetch designation command (first prefetch designation command, second prefetch designation command, and third prefetch designation command) has been received, and if it is determined that the prefetch designation command has been received (Yes) ), The process proceeds to step S33-2, and if it is determined that the prefetch designation command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-2, prefetch information analysis processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-3. In the prefetch information analysis process, information designated by the prefetch designation command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 as the hold information.
In the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, a hold information storage area capable of storing hold information is set. In addition, as a reserved information storage area, a first reserved information storage area corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (Special Figure 1 start information storage area of the RAM 230) and a second special symbol lottery (Special Figure 2 start information storage area of the RAM 230). ) Corresponding to the second hold information storage area.
The first hold information storage area includes a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit as a storage unit capable of storing the hold information. In the first hold information storage area, hold information corresponding to the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area is stored. That is, the hold information stored in the first storage unit of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the second storage unit of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the second storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the third storage unit of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the third storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 start information stored in the fourth storage unit of the special figure 1 start information storage area.
The second hold information storage area includes a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit as a storage unit capable of storing the hold information. In the second hold information storage area, hold information corresponding to the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area is stored. That is, the hold information stored in the first storage unit of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 start information stored in the first storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the second storage unit of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 start information stored in the second storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the third storage unit of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 start information stored in the third storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the fourth storage unit of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 start information stored in the fourth storage unit of the special figure 2 start information storage area.
Each hold information includes symbol information indicating the type of stop symbol, first variation information indicating the content of the variation mode (“variation mode number” or “undefined value”), and the content of the variation pattern (“variation pattern number” or Second variation information indicating “indefinite value”).

In the prefetch information analysis process, first, it is determined whether or not the received first prefetch designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
When it is determined that the received first prefetching designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol designated by the first prefetching designation command (“missing symbol” or “hit p symbol” )), The contents of the fluctuation mode designated by the second prefetch designation command ("fluctuation mode m" or "undefined value"), and the contents of the fluctuation pattern designated by the third prefetch designation command ("fluctuation pattern n" or " Indefinite value "), the symbol information corresponding to the analyzed stop symbol type, the first variation information corresponding to the analyzed variation mode content, and the second corresponding to the analyzed variation pattern content Hold information including fluctuation information is generated. Then, the generated hold information is stored (saved) in the first hold information storage area.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the received first prefetching designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol designated by the first prefetching designation command (“missing symbol” or “hit p symbol” )), The contents of the fluctuation mode designated by the second prefetch designation command ("fluctuation mode m" or "undefined value"), and the contents of the fluctuation pattern designated by the third prefetch designation command ("fluctuation pattern n" or " Indefinite value "), the symbol information corresponding to the analyzed stop symbol type, the first variation information corresponding to the analyzed variation mode content, and the second corresponding to the analyzed variation pattern content Hold information including fluctuation information is generated. Then, the generated hold information is stored (saved) in the second hold information storage area.
In the following description, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area in step S33-2 is referred to as “prefetch target hold information”. Further, among the hold information stored in the first hold information storage area, the hold information for which notification display (variable display and stop display) is executed before the prefetch target hold information is referred to as “preceding hold information”.

In step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the prefetching notice effect is being executed. If it is determined that the prefetching notice effect is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S33-4 and the prefetching notice effect is displayed. If it is determined that the process is being executed (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of pre-reading notice effects are configured so as not to be executed with overlapping times. That is, “1” is set in the pre-reading notice effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 during execution of one prefetching notice effect of the pending notice effect and the accessory continuous notice effect. When “1” is set in the pre-reading notice effect flag area, the pre-reading notice effect is not newly started.
Therefore, in step S33-3, when “1” is set in the pre-reading notice effect flag area, it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect flag area is being executed, and “0” is set in the pre-read notice effect flag area. If it is set, it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed.
It should be noted that a plurality of types of pre-reading notice effects may be executed with overlapping times.

In step S33-4, it is determined whether or not the prefetching notice effect execution condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the prefetching notice effect execution condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-5, and the prefetching notice effect execution condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the condition is not satisfied (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In the present embodiment, (1) the prefetch target hold information is the hold information corresponding to the special figure 2 start information, and (2) the predecessor hold information of a predetermined number (in this embodiment, “1”) or more is stored. (3) that there is no pre-holding information indicating the type (variation pattern number) belonging to “normal reach variation” or “super reach variation” as the type of variation pattern, and (4) that a big hit gaming state is occurring Is determined to satisfy the pre-reading notice effect execution condition.
Note that the contents of the pre-reading notice effect execution condition can be changed as appropriate. That is, when not one or more of the above conditions (1) to (4) but one or more of the above conditions (1) to (4) are satisfied, It doesn't matter. Further, as the pre-reading notice effect execution condition, other conditions different from the above conditions (1) to (4) may be included.

In step S33-5, a pre-reading notice effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-6. In the prefetching notice effect lottery process, a prefetching notice effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the prefetch notice effect is executed.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a prefetching notice effect lottery table in which the winning value of the prefetching notice effect lottery is registered.
In the prefetching notice effect lottery process, first, a prefetching notice effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Then, based on the acquired prefetching notice effect lottery random number and the prefetching notice effect lottery table, it is determined whether to execute the prefetching notice effect.
In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not the prefetching notice effect lottery executed in step S33-5 has been won. If it is determined that the prefetching notice effect lottery has been won (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-7. If it is determined that it has been lost in the pre-reading notice effect lottery (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In step 33-7, a pre-reading notice effect setting process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5). The prefetch notice effect setting process will be described later.

Next, the pre-reading notice effect setting process in step S33-7 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a prefetch notice effect setting process.
When the pre-reading notice effect setting process is executed in step S33-7, the process proceeds to step S40-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S40-1, a prefetch notice effect category lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-2. In the prefetching notice effect category lottery process, the type of the prefetching notice effect is selected.
In the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, the prefetching notice effect category lottery in which the correspondence between the prefetching notice effect category lottery random number and the type of the prefetching notice effect (“holding notice effect” or “actual continuous notice effect”) is registered. The table is stored.
In addition, as the prefetching notice effect category lottery table, prefetching notice effect category lottery tables corresponding to combinations of the variation mode type and the variation pattern type are stored.
In the prefetching notice effect category lottery process, first, a prefetching notice effect category lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of variation mode indicated by the prefetch target hold information and the type of change pattern indicated by the prefetch target hold information are confirmed, and the prefetch notice effect category lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Then, the type of the prefetching notice effect is selected (determined) based on the acquired prefetching notice effect category lottery random number and the read prefetching notice effect category lottery table.

In step S40-2, it is determined whether or not the special lottery conditions are satisfied. If it is determined that the special lottery conditions are satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S40-3 and the special lottery conditions are satisfied. When it determines with there being (No), it transfers to step S40-5.
Here, a special lottery flag area is provided in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
When the special lottery period is not set, “0” is set in the special lottery period flag area.
On the other hand, during the setting of the special lottery period, any one value among “1” to “6” is set in the special lottery period flag area.
At this time, when the first half period is set as the special lottery period and the hold notice effect is set as the special lottery target effect, “1” is set in the special lottery period flag area. . On the other hand, when the first half period is set as the special lottery period and the accessory continuous notice effect is set as the special lottery target effect, “2” is set in the special lottery period flag area. The On the other hand, when the first half period is set as the special lottery period and the main notice effect is set as the special lottery target effect, “3” is set in the special lottery period flag area.
On the other hand, when the second half period is set as the special lottery period and the holding notice effect is set as the special lottery target effect, “4” is set in the special lottery period flag area. On the other hand, when the second half period is set as the special lottery period and the accessory continuous notice effect is set as the special lottery target effect, “5” is set in the special lottery period flag area. The On the other hand, when the second half period is set as the special lottery period and the main notice effect is set as the special lottery effect, “6” is set in the special lottery period flag area.
In addition, the effect control circuit 300 includes a time reduction counter. The time reduction counter counts the number of special symbol notification displays (time reduction times) executed during time reduction control.

In step S40-2, it is first determined whether or not a special lottery period is being set.
At this time, if the value of the special lottery period flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is “1” to “6”, it is determined that the special lottery period is being set, and the value of the special lottery period flag area is set. Is “0”, it is determined that the special lottery period is not being set.
If it is determined that the special lottery period is not being set, it is determined that the special lottery condition is not satisfied.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the special lottery period is being set, it is further determined whether or not the special lottery period is currently in progress.
At this time, if the value of the special lottery period flag area is “1” to “3” (value for designating the first half period) and the value of the hour / hour counter is less than “50”, the special lottery period It is determined that On the other hand, when the value of the special lottery period flag area is “4” to “6” (value specifying the second half period) and the value of the hour / hour counter is less than “50”, the special lottery period is not in progress. Is determined. On the other hand, when the value of the special lottery period flag area is “4” to “6” (value for designating the second half period) and the value of the hour / hour counter is “50” or more, the special lottery period Judge that there is.
If it is determined that the special lottery period is not in progress, it is determined that the special lottery condition is not satisfied.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the special lottery period is in progress, it is further determined whether or not the type of the variation pattern indicated by the prefetch target hold information is “super reach variation”.
If it is determined that the type of variation pattern indicated by the prefetch target hold information is not “super reach variation”, it is determined that the special lottery condition is not satisfied.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the type of the variation pattern indicated by the prefetch target hold information is “super reach variation”, the type of the prefetch notice effect selected in step S40-1 is further designated as the special lottery target effect. It is determined whether or not it has been done.
At this time, the type of the pre-reading notice effect selected in step S40-1 is “holding notice effect”, and the value of the special lottery target effect flag area is a value corresponding to “hold notice effect” (specifically, , “1” or “4”), it is determined that the type of the prefetch notice effect selected in step S40-1 is designated as the special lottery effect.
On the other hand, if the type of the pre-reading notice effect selected in step S40-1 is “holding notice effect” and the value of the special lottery target effect flag area is not a value corresponding to “hold notice effect”, step It is determined that the type of the pre-reading notice effect selected in S40-1 is not designated as the special lottery target effect.
On the other hand, the type of the pre-reading notice effect selected in step S40-1 is “actual consecutive notice effect”, and the value of the special lottery target effect flag area is a value (specifically) Specifically, in the case of “2” or “5”), it is determined that the type of the prefetch notice effect selected in step S40-1 is designated as the special lottery target effect.
On the other hand, when the type of the pre-reading notice effect selected in step S40-1 is “actual consecutive notice effect”, and the value of the special lottery target effect flag area is not a value corresponding to “actual consecutive notice effect”. Is determined that the type of the pre-reading notice effect selected in step S40-1 is not designated as the special lottery target effect.
On the other hand, the type of the pre-reading notice effect selected in step S40-1 is “main notice effect”, and the value of the special lottery target effect flag area is a value corresponding to “main notice effect” (specifically, In the case of “3” or “6”), it is determined that the type of the prefetch notice effect selected in step S40-1 is designated as the special lottery target effect.
On the other hand, if the type of the pre-reading notice effect selected in step S40-1 is “main notice effect” and the value of the special lottery target effect flag area is not a value corresponding to “main notice effect”, step It is determined that the type of the pre-reading notice effect selected in S40-1 is not designated as the special lottery target effect.
If it is determined that the type of the prefetch notice effect selected in step S40-1 is not designated as a special lottery target effect set in advance, it is determined that the special lottery condition is not satisfied.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the type of the prefetch notice effect selected in step S40-1 is designated as a special lottery target effect set in advance, it is determined that the special lottery condition is satisfied.
As described above, in step S40-2, (1) it is in a special lottery period set in advance, (2) the type of the variation pattern indicated by the prefetch target hold information is “super reach variation”, and (3) It is determined that the special lottery condition is satisfied when the type of the pre-reading notice effect selected in step S40-1 satisfies all the conditions that it is designated as the special lottery target effect. The
On the other hand, when at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, it is determined that the special lottery condition is not satisfied.

In step S40-3, a prefetch advance notice special lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-4. In the prefetch notice special lottery process, the content of the prefetch notice effect is selected and set based on the special lottery process.
Specifically, in the prefetch notice special lottery process, if the type of the prefetch notice effect selected in step S40-1 is a hold notice effect, a hold notice special lottery process described later is executed.
On the other hand, in the pre-reading notice special lottery process, if the type of the pre-reading notice effect selected in step S40-1 is an accessory continuous notice effect, an accessory continuous notice special lottery process described later is executed.

In the hold notice special lottery process, the contents of the hold notice effect are selected and set based on the special lottery process.
Specifically, in the holding advance notice special lottery process, first, the holding final color selection process is executed.
In the hold final color selection process, the hold final color is selected and set.
The “holding final color” refers to the color of the notice target holding symbol hy that finally changes in the holding notice effect.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a reserved final color lottery table in which correspondences between types of variation patterns and reserved final color lottery random numbers and reserved final colors are registered.
In addition, a normal reserved final color lottery table and a special reserved final color lottery table are stored as the reserved final color lottery table.

The normal hold final color lottery table is used when selecting and setting the content of the hold notice effect based on the normal lottery process. In the normal reserved final color lottery table, “blue”, “green”, “purple”, and “red” are registered as the reserved final colors. As a result, when the reserved final color is selected using the normal reserved final color lottery table, one of “blue”, “green”, “purple”, and “red” is selected.
The special hold final color lottery table is used when selecting and setting the content of the hold notice effect based on the special lottery process. In the special reserved final color lottery table, the probability that “red” is selected as the reserved final color is higher than in the normal reserved final color lottery table. In the present embodiment, only “red” is registered as the reserved final color in the special reserved final color lottery table. Thus, when the reserved final color is selected using the special reserved final color lottery table, “red” is always selected.

In the reserved final color selection process included in the reserved advance notice special lottery process, first, the special reserved final color lottery table is read. Further, the reserved final color lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of variation pattern indicated by the prefetch target hold information is confirmed. Then, with reference to the read special reserved final color lottery table, the reserved final color corresponding to the combination of the acquired reserved final color lottery random number and the confirmed variation pattern type is selected (determined).
At this time, in the hold final color selection process included in the hold notice special lottery process, “red” is always selected as the hold final color.

In the reservation advance notice special lottery process, next, a hold change opportunity selection process is executed.
In the hold change opportunity selection process, a hold change opportunity is selected and set.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a pending change opportunity lottery table in which correspondences between pending change opportunity lottery random numbers and combinations of pending change timings are registered.
In addition, a hold change opportunity lottery table corresponding to each combination of the special figure 2 hold number ("2" to "4") and the hold final color is stored as the hold change opportunity lottery table.
In the hold change opportunity selection process, first, a hold change opportunity lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Also, the number of special figure 2 hold and the hold final color selected in the hold final color selection process are confirmed, and a hold change opportunity lottery table corresponding to this check result is read. Then, based on the acquired on-hold change opportunity lottery random number and the read on-hold change opportunity lottery table, a combination of on-hold change opportunity lots is determined (determined). Then, according to the determined combination of hold change triggers, one or more hold change triggers related to the hold notice effect are set.

In the hold notice special lottery process, the process proceeds to a hold change content selection process.
In the hold change content selection process, the hold change content corresponding to each hold change opportunity is selected and set.
Specifically, in the pending change content selection process, as the pending change content corresponding to each time the pending change opportunity, the color of the notice target reserved symbol hy before the change and the color of the notice target reserved symbol hy after the change are displayed. Is set.
In this embodiment, among one or more hold change triggers set in the hold change trigger selection process, each hold is performed in order from the hold change trigger (later hold change trigger) that arrives (occurs) later. The pending change content corresponding to the change opportunity is selected.
For example, when a hold change opportunity of 3 [times] is set in the hold change opportunity selection process, a third (last) hold change opportunity, a second hold change opportunity, and a first hold change opportunity are arranged in this order. Then, the hold change content corresponding to each hold change opportunity is selected.
Further, when selecting the hold change content corresponding to each hold change opportunity, first, the color of the notice target hold symbol hy after the change is selected, and then the color of the notice target hold symbol hy before the change is changed. Selected. At this time, as the color of the notification target reserved symbol hy before the change, a color having a low jackpot expectation is determined as compared with the color of the notification target reserved symbol hy after the change. As a result, the color of the notice target reserved symbol hy is changed (promoted) to a color with a high expectation level for jackpots in response to the arrival of each time of the hold change opportunity.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a pending change content lottery table in which the correspondence between the pending change content lottery random number and the color of the notice target pending symbol hy before change is registered.
In addition, as the pending change content lottery table, a pending change content lottery table corresponding to each color of the reserved symbol h (the color of the notification target pending symbol hy after the change) is stored.
Then, in the reserved change content lottery table corresponding to each color of the reserved symbol h (color of the notification subject reserved symbol hy after the change), the color of the notification subject reserved symbol hy after the change is displayed as the color of the notification subject reserved symbol hy before the change. Only colors with a low expectation degree of jackpot are registered as compared with colors.
In the pending change content selection processing, first, the pending change content is selected for the last pending change timing among the pending change timings set in the pending change timing selection processing. For this, first, the color of the notice target reserved symbol hy after the change related to the last change change opportunity is selected. At this time, the reserved final color selected in the reserved final color selection process is selected as the color of the notification target reserved symbol hy after the change related to the final change change event. Next, the color of the notice target reserved symbol hy before the change related to the last change change opportunity is selected. For this purpose, first, a pending change content lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the holding change content lottery table corresponding to the color of the notice target holding symbol hy after the change selected for the last holding change opportunity is read. Then, based on the acquired on-hold change content lottery random number and the read on-hold change content lottery table, the color of the notice target hold symbol hy before the change related to the last hold change opportunity is selected.
In the hold change content selection process, next, the hold change contents are selected for each hold change opportunity except for the last hold change trigger among the hold change triggers set in the hold change trigger selection process. At this time, the hold change content corresponding to each hold change trigger is determined in order from the hold change trigger that comes later.
In order to determine the hold change content corresponding to each hold change opportunity, first, the color of the notice target hold symbol hy after the change related to the hold change trigger is determined. At this time, as the color of the notice target reserved symbol hy after the change related to the current hold change trigger, the color of the previous notice target hold symbol hy that has already been selected for the next hold change trigger is selected. Next, the color of the notice target reserved symbol hy before the change related to the current hold change opportunity is determined. For this purpose, first, a pending change content lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the holding change content lottery table corresponding to the color of the notification target holding symbol hy after the change selected for the current holding change opportunity is read. Then, based on the acquired on-hold change content lottery random number and the read on-hold change content lottery table, the color of the notice target hold symbol hy before the change related to the current hold change opportunity is selected.
In the pending change content selection process, next, the pending change content selected for each pending change trigger is set in association with the pending change trigger. Thereby, according to the arrival of each hold change opportunity, the color of the notice target hold symbol hy is changed (promoted) according to the hold change content set for the hold change trigger.

In the pending notice special lottery process, next, “1” is set in the pre-read notice effect flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, display of the notice target hold symbol hy (hold notice effect) is started.
Note that “0” is set in the pre-reading notice effect flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 in accordance with the end of the hold notice effect by a process not shown.

On the other hand, in the accessory continuous notice special lottery process, the contents of the accessory continuous notice effect are selected and set based on the special lottery process.
Specifically, in the bonus continuous lottery special lottery process, a scenario selection process is first executed.
In the scenario selection process, a scenario for the effect continuous notice effect is selected and set.
The scenario (data) of the continuous action announcement effect includes information specifying a movable body presentation opportunity and information specifying a movable body presentation content (movable body operation mode) corresponding to each movable body presentation opportunity. It consists of
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a scenario lottery table in which the correspondence between the combination of the variation pattern type and the scenario lottery random number and the scenario of the effect continuous notice effect is registered.
Further, as the scenario lottery table, the scenario lottery table corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number = “2”, the scenario lottery table corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number = “3”, and the special figure 2 hold number = “4”. And a scenario lottery table corresponding to.
Then, the scenario lottery table corresponding to the special figure 2 number of holds = “2” has 2 [times] movable body effect triggers (at the start of the variable effect corresponding to the preceding hold information and the start of the object continuous notice target) A scenario in which a change production corresponding to information is specified) is registered.
On the other hand, in the scenario lottery table corresponding to the special figure 2 hold count = “3”, the movable body effect is 3 [times] (at the start of the variable effect corresponding to the first advance hold information, the second advance hold A scenario in which a change effect corresponding to information is started and a change effect corresponding to an accessory continuous notice target start information is defined is registered.
On the other hand, in the scenario lottery table corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number = “4”, the movable body effect is 4 [times] (at the start of the variable effect corresponding to the first preceding hold information, the second preceding hold) A scenario in which a variation effect corresponding to the information is started, a variation effect corresponding to the third preceding hold information is started, and a variation effect corresponding to the feature continuous notice target start information is defined). It is registered.
Here, in a scenario in which multiple movable body production opportunities are defined, the movable body production contents corresponding to the subsequent (next) movable body production opportunity correspond to the previous (previous) movable body production opportunity. Compared with the contents of the movable body effect to be performed, an operation mode having the same or high jackpot expectation is defined. As a result, the movable body operates in an operation mode with a higher degree of expectation of jackpot as the later movable body effect.

Furthermore, a normal scenario lottery table and a special scenario lottery table are stored as scenario lottery tables corresponding to each special figure 2 holding number (each of “2” to “4”).
Each normal scenario lottery table is used when selecting / setting a scenario for a continuous announcement of an accessory based on a normal lottery process. In each normal scenario lottery table, a scenario in which “first operation mode” is defined as the movable body presentation content corresponding to the last movable body presentation opportunity, and the movable body presentation corresponding to the last movable body presentation opportunity. A scenario in which “second operation mode” is defined as the content, a scenario in which “third operation mode” is defined as the movable body production content corresponding to the last movable body production opportunity, and the last movable body A scenario in which the “fourth operation mode” is defined as the movable body production content corresponding to the production opportunity is registered. As a result, when selecting a scenario for the continuous announcement of an accessory using each normal scenario lottery table, the contents of the last movable body effect (the operation mode of the movable body) are “first operation mode” to “ Among the “fourth operation modes”, one operation mode is selected.
Each special scenario lottery table is used when selecting / setting a scenario for a continuous announcement of an accessory based on a special lottery process. In the special scenario lottery table corresponding to each special figure 2 hold number (each of “2” to “4”), the final movable body effect is compared with the normal scenario lottery table corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number. There is a high probability that a scenario in which “fourth operation mode” is defined as the movable body effect content corresponding to the opportunity will be selected. In this embodiment, only the scenario in which the “fourth operation mode” is defined as the movable body effect content corresponding to the last movable body effect opportunity is registered in each special scenario lottery table. As a result, when selecting a scenario for the continuous action announcement effect using the special scenario lottery table, the “fourth operation mode” is always used as the content of the last movable body effect (the operation mode of the movable body). Is selected.

In the scenario selection process included in the bonus continuous lottery special lottery process, first, the number of special figure 2 holds is confirmed, and a special scenario lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Also, a scenario lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of variation pattern indicated by the prefetch target hold information is confirmed. Then, referring to the read special scenario lottery table, the scenario corresponding to the combination of the acquired scenario lottery random number and the confirmed variation pattern type is selected (determined).
At this time, in the scenario selection process included in the special feature continuous notice special lottery process, the scenario in which the “fourth operation mode” is defined as the movable body production content corresponding to the last movable body production opportunity is always selected. The

In the bonus continuous notice special lottery process, next, “1” is set in the pre-reading notice effect flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, in accordance with the arrival of the first movable body effect, the accessory continuous notice effect is started.
Note that, by a process not shown, “0” is set in the pre-reading notice effect flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 in accordance with the end of the accessory continuous notice effect.

In step S40-4, a special lottery period flag clear process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In the special lottery period flag clear process, “0” is set in the special lottery period flag area. This cancels the special lottery period setting.

In step S40-5, a pre-reading notice normal lottery process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5). In the pre-reading notice normal lottery process, the content of the pre-reading notice effect is selected and set based on the normal lottery process.
Specifically, in the pre-reading notice normal lottery process, if the type of the pre-reading notice effect selected in step S40-1 is a hold notice effect, a hold notice normal lottery process described later is executed.
On the other hand, in the pre-reading notice normal lottery process, when the type of the pre-reading notice effect selected in step S40-1 is an accessory continuous notice effect, the consecutive feature notice continuous lottery process described later is executed.

In the hold notice normal lottery process, the contents of the hold notice effect are selected and set based on the normal lottery process.
Specifically, in the hold advance notice normal lottery process, first, the hold final color selection process is executed.
In the hold final color selection process, the hold final color is selected and set.
That is, in the hold final color selection process included in the hold advance notice normal lottery process, first, the normal hold final color lottery table is read. Further, the reserved final color lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of variation pattern indicated by the prefetch target hold information is confirmed. Then, referring to the read normal reserved final color lottery table, the reserved final color corresponding to the combination of the acquired reserved final color lottery random number and the confirmed variation pattern type is selected (determined).
At this time, in the hold final color selection process included in the hold notice normal lottery process, one color of “blue”, “green”, “purple”, and “red” is selected as the hold final color.

In the hold advance notice normal lottery process, next, a hold change opportunity selection process is executed.
The contents of the hold change opportunity selection process included in the hold notice normal lottery process are the same as the contents of the hold change opportunity selection process included in the hold notice special lottery process, and thus the description thereof is omitted.
In the holding notice normal lottery process, the process proceeds to a holding change content selection process.
The contents of the hold change content selection process included in the hold advance notice normal lottery process are the same as the contents of the hold change content selection process included in the hold advance notice special lottery process, and thus description thereof is omitted.
In the holding notice normal lottery process, next, “1” is set in the pre-read notice effect flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, display of the notice target hold symbol hy (hold notice effect) is started.
Note that “0” is set in the pre-reading notice effect flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 in accordance with the end of the hold notice effect by a process not shown.

On the other hand, in the accessory continuous notice normal lottery process, the contents of the accessory continuous notice effect are selected and set based on the normal lottery process.
Specifically, the scenario selection process is first executed in the regular continuous lottery process for the accessory.
In the scenario selection process, a scenario for the effect continuous notice effect is selected and set.
In other words, in the scenario selection process included in the regular consecutive notice lottery process for an accessory, first, the number of special figure 2 holds is confirmed, and a normal scenario lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read. Also, a scenario lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of variation pattern indicated by the prefetch target hold information is confirmed. Then, referring to the read normal scenario lottery table, the scenario corresponding to the combination of the acquired scenario lottery random number and the confirmed variation pattern type is selected (determined).
At this time, in the scenario selection process included in the normal continuous notice lottery process for the accessory, as the movable body effect content corresponding to the last movable body effect opportunity, among the “first operation mode” to the “fourth operation mode”, A scenario in which any operation mode is defined is selected.
In the bonus continuous notice regular lottery process, next, “1” is set in the pre-read notice effect flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, in accordance with the arrival of the first movable body effect, the accessory continuous notice effect is started.
Note that, by a process not shown, “0” is set in the pre-reading notice effect flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 in accordance with the end of the accessory continuous notice effect.

Next, the variable command reception process in step S32-5 will be described.
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the variable command reception process.
When the variable command receiving process is executed in step S32-5, the process proceeds to step S34-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether a predetermined control command has been received. If it is determined that the predetermined control command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S34-2, and the predetermined control command is changed. If it is determined that it has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control commands are a symbol type designation command, a variation mode designation command, and a variation pattern designation command.
In step S34-2, a stop effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-3. In the stop effect determination process, a stop effect mode (stop effect number) is determined.
Specifically, in the stop effect determination process, the stop effect mode (stop effect number) is determined based on the stop symbol type specified by the symbol type specifying command. Then, the determined stop production number is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the production control circuit 300.

In step S34-3, a variation effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-4. In the variation effect determination process, a variation effect mode (variation effect number) is determined.
Specifically, in the variation effect determination process, first, a first variation effect determination process for determining the mode (variation effect number) of the first variation effect is executed.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a first variation effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the variation mode type (variation mode number) and the first variation effect mode (variation effect number) is registered. .
In the first variation effect determination process, first, the first variation effect lottery table is read. The first variation effect corresponding to the variation mode type (variation mode number) designated by the variation mode designation command among the first variation effect modes (variation effect numbers) registered in the first variation effect lottery table. The mode is determined (selected).

In the variation effect determination process, next, a second variation effect determination process for determining a mode (variation effect number) of the second variation effect is executed.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a second variation effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) and the second variation effect mode (variation effect number) is registered. .
In the second variation effect determination process, first, the second variation effect lottery table is read. The second variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) specified by the variation pattern designation command among the second variation effect modes (variation effect numbers) registered in the second variation effect lottery table. The mode is determined (selected).

  In the variation effect determination process, next, as the first variation effect mode (variation effect number), “pseudo continuous variation effect” (“pseudo continuous 2 variable effect”, “pseudo continuous 3 variable effect” or “pseudo continuous 4 variable effect” )) Is determined. When it is determined that “pseudo continuous variation effect” is determined as the first variation effect mode (variation effect number), the “pseudo continuous effect” mode of each time included in the “pseudo continuous variation effect” And the mode of the “pseudo continuous end effect” included in the “pseudo continuous variation effect”.

In step S34-4, a notice effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-5. The notice effect determination process will be described later.
In step S34-5, a variation effect setting process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the variation effect setting process, an effect control table for the variation effect is set.
Specifically, in the variation effect setting process, the effect control table corresponding to the first variation effect mode (variation effect number) determined in step S34-3 and the second variation effect mode determined in step S34-3. An effect control table corresponding to (variable effect number) is read out.
Next, the effect control tables that have been read out are combined to generate an effect control table related to the change effect. Then, the generated effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, the fluctuating effect is started.
Further, when “pseudo continuous variation effect” (“pseudo continuous 2 variation effect”, “pseudo continuous 3 variation effect” or “pseudo continuous 4 variation effect”) is determined as the first variation effect mode (variation effect number). The type determined in step S34-3 is set as the type of “pseudo continuous continuation effect” included in the “pseudo continuous variation effect”. Further, the type determined in step S34-3 is set as the type of “pseudo continuous end effect” included in the “pseudo continuous variation effect”.
If execution of the main notice effect is selected in step S34-4, an effect control table corresponding to the mode of the main notice effect selected in step S34-4 is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Accordingly, the main notice effect is started at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable effect.
Furthermore, when execution of the sub-notice effect is selected in step S34-4, an effect control table corresponding to the sub-notice effect mode selected in step S34-4 is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the sub-notice effect is started at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable effect.

Next, the notice effect determination process in step S34-4 will be described.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the notice effect determination process.
When the notice effect determining process is executed in step S34-4, the process proceeds to step S41-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S41-1, main notice category lottery processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-2. In the main notice category lottery process, the type of the main notice effect is selected.
As described above, in this embodiment, telop notice, cut-in notice, and button notice are defined as types of main notice effects. In the main notice category lottery process, one kind of main notice effect is selected from no main notice, telop notice, cut-in notice, and button notice.
Here, when “no main notice” is selected as the type of the main notice effect, the main notice effect is not executed.
In the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, there is a correspondence between the combination of the variation pattern type and the main notice category lottery random number and the type of the main notice effect (no main notice, telop notice, cut-in notice, or button notice). The registered main notice category lottery table is stored.
In the main notice category lottery process, first, the main notice category lottery table is read. Also, a main notice category lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is confirmed. Then, with reference to the read main notice category lottery table, the type of main notice effect corresponding to the combination of the acquired main notice category lottery random number and the confirmed variation pattern type is selected (determined).

In step S41-2, it is determined whether or not the special lottery condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the special lottery condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-3 and the special lottery condition is satisfied. When it determines with there being (No), it transfers to step S41-7.
That is, in step S41-2, first, it is determined whether or not a special lottery period is being set.
At this time, if the value of the special lottery period flag area in the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is “1” to “6”, it is determined that the special lottery period is being set, and the value of the special lottery period flag area is set. Is “0”, it is determined that the special lottery period is not being set.
If it is determined that the special lottery period is not being set, it is determined that the special lottery condition is not satisfied.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the special lottery period is being set, it is further determined whether or not the special lottery period is currently in progress.
At this time, if the value of the special lottery period flag area is “1” to “3” (value for designating the first half period) and the value of the hour / hour counter is less than “50”, the special lottery period It is determined that On the other hand, when the value of the special lottery period flag area is “4” to “6” (value specifying the second half period) and the value of the hour / hour counter is less than “50”, the special lottery period is not in progress. Is determined. On the other hand, when the value of the special lottery period flag area is “4” to “6” (value for designating the second half period) and the value of the hour / hour counter is “50” or more, the special lottery period Judge that there is.
If it is determined that the special lottery period is not in progress, it is determined that the special lottery condition is not satisfied.
On the other hand, if it is determined that it is during the special lottery period, it is further determined whether or not the type of the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is “super reach variation”.
When it is determined that the type of the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is not “super reach variation”, it is determined that the special lottery condition is not satisfied.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the type of the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is “super reach variation”, it is further determined whether or not “main notice effect” is designated as the special lottery target effect. judge.
At this time, if the value of the special lottery target effect flag area is a value corresponding to the “main notice effect” (specifically, “3” or “6”), the special lottery target effect “main notice effect” "Is specified.
On the other hand, when the value of the special lottery target effect flag area is not a value corresponding to the “main notice effect”, it is determined that “main notice effect” is not designated as the special lottery target effect.
If it is determined that the “main notice effect” is not designated as the special lottery effect, it is determined that the special lottery condition is not satisfied.
On the other hand, when it is determined that “main notice effect” is designated as the special lottery effect, it is determined that the special lottery condition is satisfied.

As described above, in step S41-2, (1) it is during a special lottery period that is set in advance, and (2) the type of variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is “super reach variation”. And (3) When all the conditions of "main notice effect" being specified as special lottery object production are fulfilled, it is judged that special lottery conditions are fulfilled.
On the other hand, when at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, it is determined that the special lottery condition is not satisfied.

In step S41-3, a main notice special lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-4. In the main notice special lottery process, the content (mode) of the main notice effect is selected and set based on the special lottery process.
Specifically, in the main notice special lottery process, if the type of the main notice effect selected in step S41-1 is a telop notice, a telop notice special lottery process described later is executed.
On the other hand, in the main notice special lottery process, when the type of the main notice effect selected in step S41-1 is a cut-in notice, a cut-in notice special lottery process described later is executed.
On the other hand, in the main notice special lottery process, when the type of the main notice effect selected in step S41-1 is a button notice, a button notice special lottery process described later is executed.

In the telop notice special lottery process, the content (mode) of the telop notice is selected and set based on the special lottery process.
Specifically, in the telop notice special lottery process, first, a telop notice type selection process is executed.
In the telop notice type selection process, the type of telop notice is selected.
In the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, a telop notice in which correspondence between a combination of a variation pattern type and a telop notice type lottery random number and a telop notice type ("telop notice A" to "telop notice C") is registered. A type lottery table is stored.
In the telop notice type selection process, first, a telop notice type lottery table is read. Also, a telop notice type lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is confirmed. Then, with reference to the read telop notice type lottery table, the type of telop notice corresponding to the combination of the acquired telop notice type lottery random number and the confirmed variation pattern type is selected (determined).

Next, in the telop notice special lottery process, a telop notice notice selection process is executed.
In the telop notice mode selection process, the telop notice mode is selected and set.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a telop notice mode lottery table in which correspondences between combinations of types of variation patterns and telop notice mode lottery random numbers and telop notice modes are registered.
Also, as the telop notice notice lottery table, the telop notice A form lottery table corresponding to “telop notice A”, the telop notice B form lottery table corresponding to “telop notice B”, and the telop corresponding to “telop notice C”. The notice C mode lottery table is stored.

Furthermore, a normal telop notice A mode lottery table and a special telop notice A mode lottery table are stored as the telop notice A mode lottery table.
The normal telop notice A mode lottery table is used when selecting and setting the telop notice mode based on the normal lottery process. In the normal telop notice A mode lottery table, “telop notice A1” to “telop notice A4” are registered as telop notice modes. Thus, when selecting a telop notice mode using the normal telop notice A mode lottery table, one mode is selected from “telop notice A1” to “telop notice A4”.
The special telop notice A mode lottery table is used when selecting and setting the telop notice mode based on the special lottery process. In the special telop notice A mode lottery table, the probability of selecting “telop notice A4” is higher than that in the normal telop notice A mode lottery table. In the present embodiment, in the special telop notice A mode lottery table, only “telop notice A4” is registered as the telop notice mode. As a result, when selecting a telop notice mode using the special telop notice A mode lottery table, “telop notice A4” is always selected.

In addition, a normal telop notice B mode lottery table and a special telop notice B mode lottery table are stored as the telop notice B mode lottery table.
The normal telop notice B mode lottery table is used when selecting and setting the telop notice mode based on the normal lottery process. In the normal telop notice B mode lottery table, “telop notice B1” to “telop notice B4” are registered as telop notice modes. Thus, when selecting a telop notice mode using the normal telop notice B mode lottery table, one of the “telop notice B1” to “telop notice B4” is selected.
The special telop notice B mode lottery table is used when selecting and setting the telop notice mode based on the special lottery process. In the special telop notice B mode lottery table, the probability that “telop notice B4” is selected is higher than that in the normal telop notice B mode lottery table. In the present embodiment, in the special telop notice B mode lottery table, only “telop notice B4” is registered as a telop notice mode. As a result, when selecting a telop notice mode using the special telop notice B mode lottery table, “telop notice B4” is always selected.

In addition, as the telop notice C mode lottery table, a normal telop notice C mode lottery table and a special telop notice C mode lottery table are stored.
The normal telop notice C mode lottery table is used when selecting and setting the telop notice mode based on the normal lottery process. In the normal telop notice C mode lottery table, “telop notice C1” to “telop notice C4” are registered as telop notice modes. As a result, when selecting the telop notice mode using the normal telop notice C mode lottery table, one of the “telop notice C1” to “telop notice C4” is selected.
The special telop notice C mode lottery table is used when selecting and setting the telop notice mode based on the special lottery process. In the special telop notice C mode lottery table, the probability of selecting “telop notice C4” is higher than that in the normal telop notice C mode lottery table. In the present embodiment, only the “telop notice C4” is registered as the telop notice form in the special telop notice C-style lottery table. As a result, when selecting a telop notice mode using the special telop notice C mode lottery table, “telop notice C4” is always selected.

In the telop notice notice selection process included in the telop notice special lottery process, first, a special telop notice notice lottery table (special telop notice notice A form lottery table, special telop corresponding to the type of telop notice selected in the telop notice kind selection process is selected. The notice B mode lottery table or the special telop notice C mode lottery table) is read out. Further, a telop notice mode lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is confirmed. Then, with reference to the read special telop notice mode lottery table, the telop notice mode corresponding to the combination of the acquired telop notice mode lottery random number and the confirmed variation pattern type is selected (determined).
Then, the selected telop notice mode is set as the main notice effect to be executed.

In the cut-in notice special lottery process, the content (mode) of the cut-in notice is selected and set based on the special lottery process.
Specifically, in the cut-in notice special lottery process, first, a cut-in notice type selection process is executed.
In the cut-in notice type selection process, the type of cut-in notice is selected.
In the ROM of the production control circuit 300, the correspondence between the combination of the variation pattern type and the cut-in notice type lottery random number and the type of the cut-in notice (“cut-in notice A” to “cut-in notice C”) is registered. The cut-in notice type lottery table is stored.
In the cut-in notice type selection process, first, a cut-in notice type lottery table is read. Further, a cut-in notice type lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is confirmed. Then, with reference to the read cut-in notice type lottery table, the type of cut-in notice corresponding to the combination of the acquired cut-in notice type lottery random number and the confirmed variation pattern type is selected (determined).

In the cut-in notice special lottery process, next, a cut-in notice mode selection process is executed.
In the cut-in notice mode selection process, a cut-in notice mode is selected and set.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a cut-in notice mode lottery table in which correspondences between combinations of types of variation patterns and cut-in notice mode lottery random numbers and cut-in notice modes are registered.
Further, as a cut-in notice mode lottery table, a cut-in notice A-type lottery table corresponding to “cut-in notice A”, a cut-in notice B-type lottery table corresponding to “cut-in notice B”, and a “cut-in notice” And a cut-in notice C mode lottery table corresponding to “C”.

Further, a normal cut-in advance notice A-type lottery table and a special cut-in advance notice A-form lottery table are stored as the cut-in advance notice A-form lottery table.
The normal cut-in notice A mode lottery table is used when a cut-in notice mode is selected and set based on a normal lottery process. In the normal cut-in notice A mode lottery table, “cut-in notice A1” to “cut-in notice A4” are registered as cut-in notice modes. Thus, when the cut-in notice mode is selected using the normal cut-in notice A-type lottery table, one of the “cut-in notice A1” to “cut-in notice A4” is selected.
The special cut-in notice A mode lottery table is used when a cut-in notice mode is selected and set based on the special lottery process. In the special cut-in notice A mode lottery table, the probability that “cut-in notice A4” is selected is higher than that in the normal cut-in notice A mode lottery table. In the present embodiment, in the special cut-in notice A mode lottery table, only “cut-in notice A4” is registered as the cut-in notice mode. Thus, when the cut-in notice mode is selected using the special cut-in notice A-type lottery table, “cut-in notice A4” is always selected.

In addition, a normal cut-in notice B-type lottery table and a special cut-in notice B-type lottery table are stored as the cut-in notice B-type lottery table.
The normal cut-in notice B mode lottery table is used when a cut-in notice mode is selected and set based on a normal lottery process. In the normal cut-in notice B mode lottery table, “cut-in notice B1” to “cut-in notice B4” are registered as cut-in notice modes. As a result, when the cut-in notice mode is selected using the normal cut-in notice B-type lottery table, one of the “cut-in notice B1” to “cut-in notice B4” is selected.
The special cut-in notice B mode lottery table is used when a cut-in notice mode is selected and set based on the special lottery process. In the special cut-in notice B mode lottery table, the probability that “cut-in notice B4” is selected is higher than that in the normal cut-in notice B mode lottery table. In the present embodiment, only “cut-in notice B4” is registered in the special cut-in notice B-type lottery table as the form of cut-in notice. Accordingly, when the cut-in notice mode is selected using the special cut-in notice B-type lottery table, “cut-in notice B4” is always selected.

In addition, a normal cut-in advance notice C mode lottery table and a special cut-in advance notice C mode lottery table are stored as the cut-in advance notice C mode lottery table.
The normal cut-in notice C mode lottery table is used when a cut-in notice mode is selected and set based on a normal lottery process. In the normal cut-in notice C mode lottery table, “cut-in notice C1” to “cut-in notice C4” are registered as cut-in notice modes. As a result, when the cut-in notice mode is selected using the normal cut-in notice C mode lottery table, one of the “cut-in notice C1” to “cut-in notice C4” is selected.
The special cut-in notice C mode lottery table is used when a cut-in notice mode is selected and set based on the special lottery process. In the special cut-in notice C mode lottery table, the probability of selecting “cut-in notice C4” is higher than that in the normal cut-in notice C mode lottery table. In the present embodiment, only the “cut-in notice C4” is registered in the special cut-in notice C mode lottery table as the form of the cut-in notice. Thus, when the cut-in notice mode is selected using the special cut-in notice C-mode lottery table, “cut-in notice C4” is always selected.

In the cut-in notice mode selection process included in the cut-in notice special lottery process, first, a special cut-in notice mode lottery table (special cut-in notice A corresponding to the type of cut-in notice type selected in the cut-in notice type selection process is selected. A mode lottery table, a special cut-in notice B mode lottery table, or a special cut-in notice C mode lottery table) is read out. Further, a cut-in notice mode lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is confirmed. Then, with reference to the read special cut-in notice mode lottery table, a cut-in notice mode corresponding to the combination of the acquired cut-in notice mode lottery random number and the confirmed variation pattern type is selected (determined). .
Then, the selected cut-in notice mode is set as the main notice effect to be executed.

In the button notice special lottery process, the content (mode) of the button notice is selected and set based on the special lottery process.
Specifically, in the button notice special lottery process, first, a button notice mode selection process is executed.
In the button notice mode selection process, a button notice mode is selected and set.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a button notice mode lottery table in which correspondences between combinations of types of variation patterns and button notice form lottery random numbers and button notice modes are registered.
In addition, as a button notice mode lottery table, a normal button notice mode lottery table and a special button notice mode lottery table are stored.
The normal button notice mode lottery table is used when selecting and setting the button notice form based on the normal lottery process. In the normal button notice mode lottery table, “button notice 1” to “button notice 4” are registered as button notice modes. As a result, when the button notice mode is selected using the normal button notice mode lottery table, one of “button notice 1” to “button notice 4” is selected.
The special button notice mode lottery table is used when selecting and setting the button notice form based on the special lottery process. In the special button notice mode lottery table, the probability that “button notice 4” is selected is higher than that in the normal button notice mode lottery table. In the present embodiment, only “button notice 4” is registered as a button notice form in the special button notice form lottery table. Thus, when the button notice mode is selected using the special button notice mode lottery table, “button notice 4” is always selected.

In the button notice mode selection process included in the button notice special lottery process, first, the special button notice mode lottery table is read. Further, a button notice mode lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is confirmed. Then, referring to the read special button notice mode lottery table, the button notice form corresponding to the combination of the acquired button notice form lottery random number and the confirmed variation pattern type is selected (determined).
Then, the selected button notice mode is set as the main notice effect to be executed.

In step S41-4, a special lottery period flag clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-5.
In the special lottery period flag clear process, “0” is set in the special lottery period flag area. This cancels the special lottery period setting.

In step S41-5, a sub-notice category lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-6. In the sub-notice category lottery process, the type of sub-notice effect is selected.
As described above, in this embodiment, the background effect notice and the mini character notice are defined as the types of the sub notice effect. Then, in the sub-notice category lottery process, one type of sub-notice effect, background effect notice, and mini character notice is selected as the sub-notice effect type.
Here, when “no sub-notice” is selected as the type of the sub-notice effect, the sub-notice effect is not executed.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 registers the correspondence between the main notice effect type and the sub notice category lottery random number, and the sub notice effect type (no sub notice, background effect notice, or mini character notice). A sub notice category lottery table is stored.
In the sub-notice category lottery process, first, the sub-notice category lottery table is read. Also, a sub-notice category lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of the main notice effect selected in step S41-1 is confirmed. Then, with reference to the read sub-notice category lottery table, the sub-notice category type corresponding to the combination of the acquired sub-notice category lottery random number and the confirmed main notice category type is selected (determined).

In step S41-6, a sub-notice lottery process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S34-5). In the sub-notice lottery process, the content (mode) of the sub-notice effect is selected and set.
Specifically, in the sub-notice lottery process, if the type of the sub-notice effect selected in step S41-5 is the background effect notice, the background effect notice lottery process described later is executed.
On the other hand, in the sub-notice lottery process, if the type of the sub-notice effect selected in step S41-5 is a mini character notice, a mini character notice lottery process described later is executed.

In the background effect notice lottery process, the background effect notice mode is selected and set.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 registers the correspondence between the variation pattern type and the background effect notice lottery random number and the background effect notice modes ("background effect notice 1" to "background effect notice 5"). A background effect notice lottery table is stored.
In the background effect notice lottery process, first, the background effect notice lottery table is read. Also, a background effect notice lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is confirmed. Then, with reference to the read background effect notice lottery table, the background effect notice lottery mode corresponding to the combination of the acquired background effect notice lottery random number and the confirmed variation pattern type is selected (determined).
Then, the selected background effect notice mode is set as the sub notice effect to be executed.

In the mini character notice lottery process, the mode of the mini character notice is selected and set.
In the ROM of the production control circuit 300, the combination of the type of variation pattern and the random lottery lottery random number and the mini character trail mode ("mini character trailer 1" to "mini character trailer 5") are registered. The table is stored.
In the mini character notice lottery process, first, the mini character notice lottery table is read. Also, a mini character notice lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is confirmed. Then, referring to the read mini character notice lottery table, the mini character notice lottery mode corresponding to the combination of the acquired mini character notice lottery random number and the confirmed variation pattern type is selected (determined).
Then, the mode of the selected mini character notice is set as the form of the sub notice effect to be executed.

In step S41-7, a main notice normal lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-5. In the main notice normal lottery process, the content (mode) of the main notice effect is selected and set based on the normal lottery process.
Specifically, in the main notice normal lottery process, when the type of the main notice effect selected in step S41-1 is a telop notice, a telop notice normal lottery process described later is executed.
On the other hand, in the main notice special lottery process, when the type of the main notice effect selected in step S41-1 is a cut-in notice, a cut-in notice normal lottery process described later is executed.
On the other hand, in the main notice special lottery process, when the type of the main notice effect selected in step S41-1 is a button notice, a button notice normal lottery process described later is executed.

In the telop notice normal lottery process, the content (mode) of the telop notice is selected and set based on the normal lottery process.
Specifically, in the telop notice normal lottery process, first, a telop notice type selection process is executed.
The contents of the telop notice type selection process included in the telop notice special lottery process are the same as the contents of the telop notice type selection process included in the telop notice special lottery process, and thus the description thereof is omitted.
In the telop notice normal lottery process, next, the telop notice mode selection process is executed.
In the telop notice mode selection process, the telop notice mode is selected and set.
Specifically, in the telop notice mode selection process included in the telop notice normal lottery process, first, a normal telop notice mode lottery table (normal telop notice A mode corresponding to the type of telop notice selected in the telop notice type selection process is selected. A lottery table, a normal telop notice B mode lottery table, or a normal telop notice C mode lottery table). Further, a telop notice mode lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is confirmed. Then, with reference to the read normal telop notice mode lottery table, the telop notice mode corresponding to the combination of the acquired telop notice mode lottery random number and the confirmed variation pattern type is selected (determined).
Then, the selected telop notice mode is set as the main notice effect to be executed.

In the cut-in notice normal lottery process, the content (mode) of the cut-in notice is selected and set based on the normal lottery process.
Specifically, in the cut-in notice normal lottery process, first, a cut-in notice type selection process is executed.
Note that the contents of the cut-in advance notice type selection process included in the cut-in advance notice lottery process are the same as the contents of the cut-in advance notice type selection process included in the cut-in advance notice special lottery process, and thus the description thereof is omitted.
In the cut-in notice normal lottery process, next, a cut-in notice mode selection process is executed.
In the cut-in notice mode selection process, a cut-in notice mode is selected and set.
Specifically, in the cut-in notice mode selection process included in the cut-in notice normal lottery process, first, a normal cut-in notice mode lottery table corresponding to the cut-in notice type selected in the cut-in notice type selection process ( A normal cut-in notice A mode lottery table, a normal cut-in notice B mode lottery table, or a normal cut-in notice C mode lottery table) is read out. Further, a cut-in notice mode lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is confirmed. Then, with reference to the read normal cut-in notice mode lottery table, a cut-in notice mode corresponding to the combination of the acquired cut-in notice mode lottery random number and the confirmed variation pattern type is selected (determined). .
Then, the selected cut-in notice mode is set as the main notice effect to be executed.

In the button notice normal lottery process, the content (mode) of the button notice is selected and set based on the normal lottery process.
Specifically, in the button notice normal lottery process, first, a button notice mode selection process is executed.
In the button notice mode selection process included in the button notice normal lottery process, first, the normal button notice mode lottery table is read. Further, a button notice mode lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is confirmed. Then, with reference to the read normal button notice mode lottery table, the button notice form corresponding to the combination of the acquired button notice form lottery random number and the confirmed variation pattern type is selected (determined).
Then, the selected button notice mode is set as the main notice effect to be executed.

Next, stop command reception processing in step S32-6 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing stop command reception processing.
When the stop command reception process is executed in step S32-6, as shown in FIG. 43, the process proceeds to step S35-1.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not a stop designation command has been received. If it is determined that a stop designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-2 and the stop designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is not (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
In step S35-2, stop effect setting processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S35-3. In the stop effect setting process, an effect control table for stop effect is set.
Specifically, in the stop effect setting process, an effect control table corresponding to the stop effect number determined in step S34-2 is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, a stop effect is started.
Here, in the stop effect, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol that were temporarily stopped at the end of the variation effect are stopped and displayed.

In step S35-3, the time reduction number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S35-4. In the time reduction number update process, “1” is added to the value of the time reduction counter of the effect control circuit 300.
In step S35-4, it is determined whether or not the first half period is designated as the special lottery period. If it is determined that the first half period is designated as the special lottery period (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-5. If it is determined that the first half period is not designated as the special lottery period (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
Here, when the value of the special lottery period flag area is “1” to “3” (value for designating the first half period), it is determined that the first half period is designated as the special lottery period, and the special lottery period When the value of the flag area is not “1” to “3” (value for designating the first half period), it is determined that the first half period is not designated as the special lottery period.
In step S35-5, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / hour counter has reached “50”. If it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter has reached “50” (Yes), step S35-6 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter has not reached “50” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
In step S35-6, a special lottery period update process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7). In the special lottery period update process, in the special lottery period flag area, a value for designating the second half period is set instead of the value for designating the first half period.
Specifically, in the special lottery period update process, when “1” is set in the special lottery period flag area, “4” is set instead of “1”. On the other hand, when “2” is set in the special lottery period flag area, “5” is set instead of “2”. On the other hand, when “3” is set in the special lottery period flag area, “6” is set instead of “3”.

Next, the opening command reception process in step S32-7 will be described.
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the opening command reception process.
When the opening command reception process is executed in step S32-7, the process proceeds to step S42-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S42-1, it is determined whether an opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that the opening designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S42-2, and the opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is not (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8).
In step S42-2, a big hit effect setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-3. In the big hit effect setting process, an effect control table for the big hit effect is set.

In the present embodiment, types corresponding to various types of jackpot symbols (“one jackpot symbol” to “four jackpot symbols”) are defined as types of jackpot effect.
In the jackpot effect setting process, a type corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol designated by the opening designation command is selected as the type of jackpot effect. Then, an effect control table corresponding to the selected type of jackpot effect is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Thereby, the big hit effect is started.

In step S42-3, it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming state to be started is “first hit”, and if it is determined that the jackpot gaming state to be started is “first hit” (Yes), When the process proceeds to S42-4 and it is determined that the big hit gaming state to be started is not “first win” (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8).
“First hit” is a big hit game that occurs in response to winning the “big hit” in the first special symbol lottery executed while the short-time control is stopped and the “special figure low probability state” occurs State.
In step S42-4, a first hit flag setting process is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8). In the first hit flag setting process, “1” is set in the first hit flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

Next, the ending command reception process in step S32-8 will be described.
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an ending command reception process.
When the ending command reception process is executed in step S32-8, the process proceeds to step S43-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S43-1, it is determined whether or not an ending designation command has been received. If it is determined that an ending designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S43-2 and the ending designation command has been received. If it is determined that there is no (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4).
In step S43-2, it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming state to be ended is “first hit”, and if it is determined that the jackpot gaming state to be ended is “first hit” (Yes), If the process shifts to S43-3 and it is determined that the jackpot gaming state to be ended is not “first win” (No), the process shifts to Step S43-4.
Here, when “1” is set in the first hit flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, it is determined that the big hit gaming state to be ended is “first hit”, and “1” is set in the first hit flag area. When “0” is set, it is determined that the jackpot gaming state to be ended is not “first win”.

In Step S43-3, the first lottery special lottery period setting process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (Step S31-4). In the first special lottery period setting process, a special lottery period and a special lottery target effect are selected and set.
Specifically, in the initial special lottery period setting process, first, a special lottery period is selected.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a special lottery period lottery table in which the correspondence between the special lottery period lottery random numbers and the special lottery period (first half period or second half period) is registered.
In addition, as the special lottery period lottery table, the first lottery special lottery period lottery table corresponding to the case of “first win”, and the non-first hit special lottery period lottery table corresponding to the case of not “first win”, Stored.
In the first lot special lottery period lottery table, the probability that the first half period is selected is higher than that in the non-first hit special lottery period lottery table. As a result, in the case of “first hit”, the first half period is more easily selected than in the case of not “first hit”.
In order to select the special lottery period, first, the special lottery period lottery table for the first hit is read. Also, a special lottery period lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Then, a special lottery period (first half period or second half period) is selected (determined) based on the read first lottery special lottery period lottery table and the acquired special lottery period lottery random number.

In the first lottery special lottery period setting process, next, a special lottery target effect is selected.
In the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, correspondence between the special lottery target effect lottery random number and the special lottery target effect ("holding notice effect", "object continuous notice effect" or "main notice effect") is registered. A special lottery target effect lottery table is stored.
Also, as the special lottery target effect lottery table, the first hit special lottery target effect lottery table corresponding to the case of “first win” and the non-first hit special lottery target effect lottery table corresponding to the case of not “first win” And are stored.
In the first hit special lottery target effect lottery table, the probability of selecting the “pending notice effect” is higher than in the non-first hit special lottery target effect lottery table. As a result, in the case of “first hit”, “holding notice effect” is more easily selected than in the case of not “first hit”.
In order to select the special lottery target effect, first, the first special lottery target effect lottery table is read. Also, a special lottery target effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Then, based on the read special lottery target effect lottery table for the first hit and the acquired special lottery target effect lottery random number, the special lottery target effect ("holding notice effect", "subject continuous notice effect" or "main Select (determine) “notice effect”).

In the initial lottery special lottery period setting process, next, in the special lottery target effect flag area, a value corresponding to the combination of the selected special lottery period and special lottery target effect is set.
At this time, if “first half period” is selected and “holding notice effect” is selected, “1” is set in the special lottery target effect flag area.
On the other hand, when “first half period” is selected and “actual article continuous notice effect” is selected, “2” is set in the special lottery target effect flag area.
On the other hand, when “first half period” is selected and “main notice effect” is selected, “3” is set in the special lottery target effect flag area.
On the other hand, when “second half period” is selected and “holding notice effect” is selected, “4” is set in the special lottery target effect flag area.
On the other hand, when “second half period” is selected and “continuous-item continuous notice effect” is selected, “5” is set in the special lottery target effect flag region.
On the other hand, when “second half period” is selected and “main notice effect” is selected, “6” is set in the special lottery target effect flag area.
In the initial winning special lottery period setting process, next, “0” is set in the initial winning flag area. In addition, an initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set in the time reduction counter.

In step S43-4, a non-initial hit special lottery period setting process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4). In the non-first win special lottery period setting process, a special lottery period and a special lottery target effect are selected and set.
Specifically, in the non-first hit special lottery period setting process, first, a special lottery period is selected.
That is, first, the non-first hit special lottery period lottery table is read. Also, a special lottery period lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Then, the special lottery period (first half period or second half period) is selected (determined) based on the read non-first hit special lottery period lottery table and the acquired special lottery period lottery random number.

In the non-first win special lottery period setting process, next, a special lottery target effect is selected.
That is, first, the non-first hit special lottery target effect lottery table is read. Also, a special lottery target effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Then, based on the read-out non-initial special lottery target effect lottery table and the acquired special lottery target effect lottery random number, the special lottery target effect ("holding notice effect", "object continuous notice effect" or " Main notice effect ") is selected (determined).

In the non-initial win special lottery period setting process, next, a value corresponding to the combination of the selected special lottery period and special lottery target effect is set in the special lottery target effect flag area.
At this time, if “first half period” is selected and “holding notice effect” is selected, “1” is set in the special lottery target effect flag area.
On the other hand, when “first half period” is selected and “actual article continuous notice effect” is selected, “2” is set in the special lottery target effect flag area.
On the other hand, when “first half period” is selected and “main notice effect” is selected, “3” is set in the special lottery target effect flag area.
On the other hand, when “second half period” is selected and “holding notice effect” is selected, “4” is set in the special lottery target effect flag area.
On the other hand, when “second half period” is selected and “continuous-item continuous notice effect” is selected, “5” is set in the special lottery target effect flag region.
On the other hand, when “second half period” is selected and “main notice effect” is selected, “6” is set in the special lottery target effect flag area.
In the non-first hit special lottery period setting process, next, an initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set in the hourly counter.

(Operation of pachinko machine 1)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, when the time reduction control is started after the end of the big hit gaming state, the special lottery period and the special lottery target effect are selected and set at the end of the big hit gaming state.
At this time, in the present embodiment, the period from the start of the time reduction control until the number of special symbol notification display executed during the time reduction control reaches a predetermined time reduction number is a plurality of sections (specifically, A first half period and a second half period), and one of the plurality of sections is selected and set as a special lottery period.
Further, in the present embodiment, one of the plurality of types of notice effects (“holding notice effect”, “object continuous notice effect”, and “main notice effect”) is selected and set as the special lottery target effect. Is done.
Then, by a game determination (preliminary determination or start determination) executed during a special lottery period set in advance, a specific variation pattern type (“super reach variation”) is selected, and the result of the game determination If a special lottery target effect set in advance is selected as the type of the notice effect that suggests, the lottery process for selecting the content (aspect) of the notice effect is replaced with the normal lottery process. Processing is executed.
In particular, in the special lottery process, as compared with the normal lottery process, the probability that a specific mode (specifically, the mode with the highest jackpot expectation or reach expectation) is selected as the mode of the notice effect. Get higher.
As a result, when the first half period is set as the special lottery period, when the “super reach fluctuation” is first determined after the start of the time reduction control, the big hit expectation is high as a mode of the notice effect. A mode is easily selected.
On the other hand, when the second half period is set as the special lottery period, after the number of special symbol notification displays executed during the short-time control reaches 50 [times], the “super reach fluctuation” When it is determined, it is easy to select a mode with a high expectation level for jackpot as the mode of the notice effect.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when a type with a high jackpot expectation degree (specifically, “super reach fluctuation”) is selected as the type of fluctuation pattern during the time-shortening control, Therefore, it is easy to select an aspect with a high jackpot expectation (or reach expectation).
Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a mode with a high expectation level is not selected as a mode of a notice effect, even though a type with a high jackpot expectation level is selected as the type of variation pattern. .

(Operation of pachinko machine 1)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, during the special lottery period, when “super reach fluctuation” is selected as the type of fluctuation pattern, a predetermined mode (a big hit expectation degree or reach is compared with the case where another type is selected). The notice effect with the highest expectation) is likely to appear.
As a result, a situation in which a mode with a high jackpot expectation level is not selected as a mode of the notice effect is continuously generated even though a type with a high jackpot expectation level is selected as the type of variation pattern. Can be suppressed.
Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the special lottery period is included in the occurrence of a gaming state advantageous to the player (during time-shortening control).
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an impression that the big hit is far despite the occurrence of a gaming state advantageous to the player (during time-shortening control).

(Modification)
As mentioned above, although embodiment of this invention was described, in the said embodiment, a various change is possible.
For example, in the above embodiment, the contents of the special lottery conditions can be changed as appropriate.
That is, in the above embodiment, (1) it is during a special lottery period that is set in advance, (2) a specific type (this embodiment) as a type of variation pattern based on game determination (preliminary determination or start determination) In this embodiment, it is preset as a notice effect (in this embodiment, a pre-read notice effect or a main notice effect) that suggests the result of the game determination. When all the conditions that the special lottery target effect is executed are satisfied, the special lottery condition is determined to be satisfied.
However, according to (1) a special lottery period set in advance and (2) game determination (preliminary determination or start determination), a specific type (in this embodiment, “ It is possible to adopt a configuration in which it is determined that the special lottery condition is satisfied when both conditions of “super-reach fluctuation” are selected are satisfied. In this configuration, when the special lottery condition is satisfied, the lottery process for selecting the content (aspect) of the notice effect (regardless of type) that suggests the result of the game determination is replaced with the normal lottery process. Thus, the special lottery process is executed.

In the above embodiment, the condition (2) included in the special lottery condition is defined as “a specific result has been determined by game determination (preliminary determination or start determination)”. As a specific result, “the“ reach reach variation ”is selected” is defined.
However, as a specific result, it may be defined that “the type of other specific variation pattern (or the type of specific variation mode) excluding“ super-reach variation ”has been determined”.

In the above-described embodiment, the specific lottery period is set while the time-shortening control is being executed (while a gaming state advantageous to the player is occurring).
However, the specific lottery period may be set during the occurrence of the “special figure high probability state” (during the occurrence of a gaming state advantageous to the player).

In the above embodiment, when the special lottery process (step S40-3, step S41-3) is executed during the setting of the special lottery period, the special lottery period setting is canceled (special lottery period flag). “0” is set in the area).
However, when the special lottery process (step S40-3, step S41-3) is executed a predetermined number of times during the setting of the special lottery period, the special lottery period setting is canceled (in the special lottery period flag area). The configuration may be such that “0” is set.
Alternatively, the special lottery period may not be canceled until the special lottery period ends (“0” is not set in the special lottery period flag area).

1 Pachinko machine 31a Display screen 200 Main control circuit 300 Production control circuit

Claims (2)

Winning determination means for determining whether or not to cause a specific gaming state;
A variation mode determination means for performing a variation mode determination for determining a variation mode;
Production control means for executing a suggestion production that suggests the possibility of occurrence of a specific gaming state,
When the predetermined variation mode is determined by the variation mode determination performed during the predetermined period, it is easier to select the predetermined mode as the suggestive effect mode than when other variation modes are determined. A gaming machine characterized by A predetermined game state control means for causing a predetermined game state that is advantageous to the player after the end of the specific game state;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined period is included in the occurrence of the predetermined gaming state.

Images